Pentax Digital Camera 15507 User Manual

SLR Digital Camera  
K-500  
Operating Manual  
To ensure the best performance from your camera, please read  
the Operating Manual before using the camera.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Thank you for purchasing this PENTAX K-500 Digital Camera. Please read this manual  
before using the camera in order to get the most out of all the features and functions. Keep  
this manual safe, as it can be a valuable tool in helping you to understand all the camera's  
capabilities.  
Lenses you can use  
In general, lenses that can be used with this camera are DA, DA L, D FA and FA J lenses  
and lenses that have an s position on the aperture ring. To use any other lens or accessory,  
see p.54 and p.259.  
Regarding copyrights  
Images taken with the K-500 that are for anything other than personal enjoyment cannot be  
used without permission according to the rights as specified in the Copyright Act. Please take  
care, as there are cases where limitations are placed on taking pictures even for personal  
enjoyment during demonstrations, performances or of items on display. Images taken with  
the purpose of obtaining copyrights also cannot be used outside the scope of use of the  
copyright as laid out in the Copyright Act, and care should be taken here also.  
Regarding trademarks  
Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United  
States and other countries. Windows Vista is either a registered trademark or trademark of  
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.  
Macintosh, Mac OS, and QuickTime are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and  
other countries.  
Intel, Intel Core, and Pentium are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other  
countries.  
SDXC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.  
Eye-Fi, the Eye-Fi logo and Eye-Fi connected are trademarks of Eye-Fi, Inc.  
This product includes DNG technology under license by Adobe Systems Incorporated.  
The DNG logo is either a registered trademark or trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated  
in the United States and/or other countries.  
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.  
This product supports PRINT Image Matching III. PRINT Image Matching enabled digital still  
cameras, printers and software help photographers to produce images more faithful to their  
intentions. Some functions are not available on printers that are not PRINT Image Matching  
III compliant.  
Copyright 2001 Seiko Epson Corporation. All Rights Reserved. PRINT Image Matching is a  
trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation. The PRINT Image Matching logo is a trademark of  
Seiko Epson Corporation.  
This product is licensed under the AVC Patent Portfolio License for the personal use of a  
consumer or other uses in which it does not receive remuneration to (i) encode video in  
compliance with the AVC standard (“AVC video”) and/or (ii) decode AVC video that was  
encoded by a consumer engaged in a personal activity and/or was obtained from a video  
provider licensed to provide AVC video. No license is granted or shall be implied for any other  
use. Additional information may be obtained from MPEG LA, L.L.C.  
See http://www.mpegla.com.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
To users of this camera  
• Do not use or store this camera in the vicinity of equipment that generates strong  
electromagnetic radiation or magnetic fields. Strong static charges or the magnetic  
fields produced by equipment such as radio transmitters could interfere with the  
monitor, damage the stored data, or affect the camera’s internal circuitry and cause  
camera misoperation.  
• The liquid crystal panel used for the monitor is manufactured using extremely high  
precision technology. Although the level of functioning pixels is 99.99% or better, you  
should be aware that 0.01% or fewer of the pixels may not illuminate or may illuminate  
when they should not. However, this has no effect on the recorded image.  
• There is a possibility that the illustrations and the display screen of the monitor in this  
manual are different from the actual ones.  
• In this manual, SD Memory Cards, SDHC Memory Cards, SDXC Memory Cards and  
Eye-Fi Cards are referred to as “SD Memory Cards”.  
• In this manual, the generic term “computer(s)” refers to either a Windows PC or a  
Macintosh.  
• This camera can be powered with the rechargeable lithium-ion battery D-LI109, the  
AA battery holder D-BH109 with four AA batteries, or an optional AC adapter. The  
power supply provided with this camera varies depending on the country or region  
where the camera was purchased. This manual is mainly written assuming that the  
camera is used with the rechargeable lithium-ion battery D-LI109.  
• In this manual, both D-LI109 and D-BH109 are referred to as the “battery” unless  
otherwise stated. Except this, the generic term “battery(ies)” refers to any type of  
batteries used for this camera and its accessories.  
For Using Your Camera Safely  
We have paid close attention to the safety of this camera. When using this camera,  
we request your special attention regarding items marked with the following  
symbols.  
This symbol indicates that ignoring this item could cause serious  
personal injuries.  
Warning  
This symbol indicates that ignoring this item could cause minor  
Caution  
or medium personal injuries, or loss of property.  
About the Camera  
Warning  
• Do not disassemble or modify the camera. High voltage areas are present inside the  
camera, with the risk of electric shock.  
• If the camera interior is exposed due to dropping or otherwise damaging the camera,  
never touch the exposed portion. There is a risk of electric shock.  
• Do not aim the camera at the sun or other strong light sources when taking pictures  
or leave the camera sitting in direct sunlight with the lens cap off. Doing so may cause  
the camera to malfunction or cause a fire.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2
• Do not look at the sun or other strong light sources through the lens. Doing so may  
lead to a loss of eyesight or cause vision to be impaired.  
• If any irregularities occur during use, such as smoke or a strange odor, stop use  
immediately, remove the battery or the AC adapter, and contact your nearest  
PENTAX Service Center. Continued use can cause a fire or electrical shock.  
Caution  
• Do not place your finger over the flash when discharging the flash. You may burn  
yourself.  
• Do not cover the flash with clothing when discharging the flash. Discoloration may  
occur.  
• Some portions of the camera heat up during use. There is a risk of low temperature  
burns when holding such portions for long periods.  
• Should the monitor be damaged, be careful of glass fragments. Also, be careful not  
to allow the liquid crystal to get on your skin or in your eyes or mouth.  
• Depending on your individual factors or physical condition, the use of the camera may  
cause itching, rashes or blisters. In case of any abnormality, stop using the camera  
and get medical attention immediately.  
About the Battery Charger and AC Adapter  
Warning  
• Always use the battery charger and AC adapter exclusively developed for this  
camera, with the specified power and voltage. Using a battery charger or AC adapter  
not exclusive to this camera, or using the exclusive battery charger or AC adapter with  
an unspecified power or voltage can cause a fire, electric shock, or camera  
breakdown. The specified voltage is 100 - 240V AC.  
• Do not disassemble or modify the product. This can cause a fire or electrical shock.  
• If the generation of smoke or strange odor from the product or other abnormality  
occurs, immediately discontinue using and consult a PENTAX Service Center.  
Continued use can cause a fire or electrical shock.  
• If water should happen to get inside the product, consult a PENTAX Service Center.  
Continued use can cause a fire or electrical shock.  
• If you see a lightning flash or hear thunder during use of the battery charger or AC  
adapter, unplug the power plug and discontinue use. Continued use can cause  
damage to the product, fire or electrical shock.  
• Wipe off the power plug if it should become covered with dust. Accumulated dust may  
cause a fire.  
• To reduce the risk of hazards, use only CSA/UL certified power supply cord set, cord  
is Type SPT-2 or heavier, minimum NO.18 AWG copper, one end with a molded-on  
male attachment plug cap (with a specified NEMA configuration), and the other is  
provided with a molded-on female connector body (with a specified IEC nonindustrial  
type configuration) or the equivalent.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Caution  
• Do not place or drop heavy objects on or forcefully bend the AC plug cord. Doing so  
may damage the cord. Should the AC plug cord be damaged, consult a PENTAX  
Service Center.  
• Do not touch or short-circuit the terminal area of the AC plug cord while the cord is  
plugged in.  
• Do not handle the power plug with wet hands. This can cause an electric shock.  
• Do not drop the product, or subject it to violent impact. This can cause the product  
breakdown.  
• Do not use the battery charger D-BC109 to charge batteries other than the  
rechargeable lithium-ion battery D-LI109. Attempting to charge other types of  
batteries may cause an explosion or heating, or may damage the battery charger.  
About the Rechargeable Lithium-ion Battery  
Warning  
• If any leakage from the battery should come in contact with your eyes, do not rub  
them. Flush your eyes with clean water and get medical attention immediately.  
Caution  
• Only use the specified battery with this camera. Use of other batteries may cause an  
explosion or fire.  
• Do not disassemble the battery. Disassembling the battery may cause an explosion  
or leakage.  
• Remove the battery from the camera immediately if it becomes hot or begins to  
smoke. Be careful not to burn yourself during removal.  
• Keep wires, hairpins, and other metal objects away from the + and - contacts of the  
battery.  
• Do not short the battery or dispose of the battery in fire. This can cause an explosion  
or fire.  
• If any leakage from the battery should come in contact with skin or clothing, it may  
cause irritation to the skin. Wash the affected areas thoroughly with water.  
• Precautions for D-LI109 Battery Usage:  
USE SPECIFIED CHARGER ONLY.  
-
-
-
-
DO NOT INCINERATE.  
DO NOT DISASSEMBLE.  
DO NOT SHORT CIRCUIT.  
DO NOT EXPOSE TO HIGH TEMP. (140°F/60°C)  
About the Usage of AA Batteries  
Warning  
• If any leakage from the battery should come in contact with your eyes, do not rub  
them. Flush your eyes with clean water and get medical attention immediately.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4
Caution  
• When using the AA battery holder D-BH109, four AA alkaline, AA lithium or AA Ni-MH  
batteries can be used. Do not use batteries other than those specified here. Using  
other types of batteries may cause the camera to function poorly, or the batteries may  
explode or cause a fire.  
• The batteries should be inserted correctly, observing (+) and (-) marks on the  
batteries. Inserting the batteries incorrectly may cause an explosion or fire.  
• When replacing the batteries, do not combine different brands, types or capacities.  
Also, do not combine old batteries with new ones. Inserting the batteries incorrectly  
may cause an explosion or fire.  
• Do not short the batteries or dispose of the batteries in fire. Do not disassemble the  
batteries. The batteries could explode or catch fire.  
• Do not charge any batteries other than rechargeable Ni-MH batteries. The batteries  
could explode or catch fire. AA batteries for use with this camera other than Ni-MH  
batteries cannot be charged.  
• Do not open the battery cover or remove the batteries while the power is on.  
• Remove the batteries when you do not plan to use the camera for a long time. The  
batteries may leak.  
• If any leakage from the battery should come in contact with skin or clothes, it may  
cause irritation to the skin. Wash the affected areas thoroughly with water.  
• Remove the batteries from the camera immediately if they become hot or begin to  
smoke. Be careful not to burn yourself during removal.  
Keep the Camera and its Accessories out of the Reach of  
Small Children  
Warning  
• Do not place the camera and its accessories within the reach of small children.  
1. If the product falls or is operated accidentally, it may cause serious personal  
injuries.  
2. Wrapping the strap around a neck may cause suffocation.  
3. To avoid the risk of a small accessory such as the battery or SD Memory Cards  
from being swallowed by mistake, keep them out of the reach of small children.  
Seek medical attention immediately if an accessory is accidentally swallowed.  
Care to be Taken During Handling  
Before Using Your Camera  
• When traveling, take the Worldwide Service Network listing that is included in the  
package. This will be useful if you experience problems abroad.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
• When the camera has not been used for a long time, confirm that it is still working  
properly, particularly prior to taking important pictures (such as at a wedding or when  
traveling). Contents of the recording cannot be guaranteed if recording, playback or  
transferring your data to a computer, etc. is not possible due to a malfunction of your  
camera or recording media (SD Memory Card), etc.  
About the Rechargeable Lithium-ion Battery and Battery  
Charger  
• To keep the battery in optimum condition, avoid storing it in a fully charged state or in  
high temperatures.  
• If the battery is left inserted and the camera is not used for a long time, the battery will  
over-discharge and shorten the battery’s life.  
• Charging the battery a day before use or on the day of use is recommended.  
• The AC plug cord provided with this camera or included with the battery charger kit  
K-BC109 is developed exclusively for the battery charger D-BC109. Do not use it with  
other devices.  
Precautions on Carrying and Using Your Camera  
• Do not subject the camera to high temperatures or high humidity. Do not leave the  
camera in a vehicle, as the temperature can get very high.  
• Do not subject the camera to strong vibrations, shocks, or pressure. Use a cushion to  
protect the camera from vibrations of motorcycles, automobiles, or ships.  
• The temperature range for camera use is -10°C to 40°C (14°F to 104°F).  
• The monitor may appear black at high temperatures, but will return to normal at  
normal temperatures.  
• The monitor may respond more slowly at low temperatures. This is due to liquid  
crystal properties, and is not a malfunction.  
• Sudden temperature changes will cause condensation on the inside and outside of  
the camera. Place the camera in your bag or a plastic bag, and remove it after  
temperature of the camera and surroundings are equalized.  
• Avoid contact with garbage, mud, sand, dust, water, toxic gases, or salt. These could  
cause the camera to breakdown. Wipe the camera to dry off any rain or water drops.  
• Do not press the monitor with excessive force. This could cause it to break or  
malfunction.  
• Be careful not to overtighten the screw in the tripod socket when using a tripod.  
Cleaning Your Camera  
• Do not clean the camera with organic solvents such as thinner, alcohol, or benzine.  
• Use a lens brush to remove dust accumulated on the lens or viewfinder. Never use a  
spray blower for cleaning as it may damage the lens.  
• Please contact a PENTAX Service Center for professional cleaning of the CMOS  
sensor. (This will involve a fee.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
• Periodic inspections are recommended every one to two years to maintain high  
performance.  
Storing Your Camera  
• Do not store the camera with preservatives or chemicals. Storage in high  
temperatures and high humidity can cause mold to grow on the camera. Remove the  
camera from its case and store it in a dry and well-ventilated place.  
• Avoid using or storing the camera where it may be exposed to static electricity or  
electrical interference.  
• Avoid using or storing the camera in direct sunlight or in locations where it may be  
exposed to rapid changes in temperature or to condensation.  
About SD Memory Cards  
• The SD Memory Card is equipped with a write-  
protect switch. Setting the switch to LOCK  
prevents new data from being recorded on the  
card, the stored data from being deleted, and the  
card from being formatted by the camera or  
computer.  
Write-protect  
switch  
The SD Memory Card may be hot when removing  
the card immediately after using the camera.  
• Do not remove the SD Memory Card or turn off the power while the card is being  
accessed. This may cause the data to be lost or the card to be damaged.  
• Do not bend the SD Memory Card or subject it to violent impact. Keep it away from  
water and store away from high temperatures.  
• Do not remove the SD Memory Card while formatting. The card may be damaged and  
become unusable.  
Data on the SD Memory Card may be deleted in the following circumstances. We do  
not accept any liability for data that is deleted if  
1. the SD Memory Card is mishandled by the user.  
2. the SD Memory Card is exposed to static electricity or electrical interference.  
3. the SD Memory Card has not been used for a long time.  
4. the SD Memory Card or the battery is removed while the card is being accessed.  
• If the SD Memory Card is not used for a long time, the data on the card may become  
unreadable. Be sure to regularly make a backup of important data on a computer.  
• Format new SD Memory Cards. Also format SD Memory Cards previously used with  
other cameras or devices.  
• Please note that deleting data stored on an SD Memory Card, or formatting an SD  
Memory Card does not completely erase the original data. Deleted data can  
sometimes be recovered using commercially available software. If you are going to  
discard, give away or sell your SD Memory Card, you should ensure that the data on  
the card is completely deleted or the card itself is destroyed if it contains any personal  
or sensitive information.  
• The data on your SD Memory Card should be managed at your own risk.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
7
About Eye-Fi Cards  
• An SD Memory Card with a built-in wireless LAN ("Eye-Fi card") can be used with this  
camera.  
• Use of an access point and an Internet connection are required for transferring  
images via wireless LAN. For details, refer to the Eye-Fi website. (http://www.eye.fi)  
• Use Eye-Fi cards which have been updated to the newest firmware.  
• Set [Eye-Fi] to [Off], or do not use an Eye-Fi card in a location where the use of  
wireless LAN devices is restricted or prohibited, such as airplanes.  
• Eye-Fi cards can be used only in the country in which the card was purchased. Please  
observe all local laws governing Eye-Fi card usage.  
• This camera features a function to enable/disable the communication function of the  
Eye-Fi card, however, we do not guarantee the operability of all Eye-Fi card functions.  
• Refer to the Eye-Fi card manual for details on how to use the card.  
• Please contact the Eye-Fi card manufacturer regarding any malfunctions or problems  
concerning Eye-Fi cards.  
Regarding User Registration  
In order to better serve you, we request that you complete the user registration, which can  
be found on the CD-ROM supplied with the camera or on the PENTAX website.  
Refer to p.237 for details. Thank you for your cooperation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8
Memo  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9
Contents  
For Using Your Camera Safely............................................................ 1  
Care to be Taken During Handling ...................................................... 4  
Contents............................................................................................... 9  
Composition of the Operating Manual ............................................... 15  
Before Using Your Camera  
17  
Checking the Contents of the Package......................................18  
Names and Functions of the Working Parts..............................19  
Capture Mode .................................................................................... 20  
Playback Mode .................................................................................. 22  
Monitor Display .................................................................................. 24  
Viewfinder .......................................................................................... 35  
How to Change Function Settings..............................................37  
Using the Direct Keys ........................................................................ 37  
Using the Control Panel..................................................................... 38  
Using the Menus................................................................................ 39  
Getting Started  
Attaching the Strap ......................................................................44  
Inserting the Battery.....................................................................45  
Using the Lithium-ion Battery............................................................. 45  
Using the AA Batteries....................................................................... 48  
Using the AC Adapter ........................................................................ 50  
Inserting/Removing an SD Memory Card...................................52  
Attaching a Lens...........................................................................54  
Adjusting the Viewfinder Diopter................................................56  
Turning the Camera On and Off..................................................57  
Initial Settings...............................................................................58  
Setting the Display Language............................................................ 58  
Setting the Date and Time ................................................................. 60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
10  
Basic Operations  
63  
Basic Shooting Operation ...........................................................64  
Letting the Camera Choose the Optimal Settings.............................. 64  
Using the Built-in Flash ...............................................................68  
Setting the Flash Mode...................................................................... 68  
Using the Built-in Flash...................................................................... 71  
Reviewing Images ........................................................................72  
Playing Back Images ......................................................................... 72  
Deleting a Single Image..................................................................... 73  
Shooting Functions  
75  
How to Operate the Shooting Functions....................................76  
Direct Keys Setting Items................................................................... 76  
Rec. Mode Menu Items...................................................................... 77  
Movie Menu Items.............................................................................. 79  
Custom Setting Menu Items............................................................... 80  
Selecting the Appropriate Capture Mode...................................82  
Auto Picture Modes............................................................................ 83  
Exposure Modes................................................................................ 86  
Setting the Exposure....................................................................87  
Setting the Sensitivity......................................................................... 87  
Changing the Exposure Mode ........................................................... 89  
Adjusting the Exposure...................................................................... 92  
Locking the Exposure Before Shooting (AE Lock)............................. 96  
Selecting the Metering Method .......................................................... 97  
Reducing the Image Noise (Noise Reduction)................................... 98  
Focusing......................................................................................101  
Setting the Focus Mode................................................................... 101  
Selecting the Focusing Point (AF Point) .......................................... 104  
Setting the Contrast AF during Live View ........................................ 106  
Checking the Focus ......................................................................... 109  
Adjusting the Focus Manually (Manual Focus)................................ 110  
AF Fine Adjustment ......................................................................... 112  
Checking the Depth of Field (Preview).....................................114  
Displaying the Optical Preview ........................................................ 114  
Displaying the Digital Preview.......................................................... 115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11  
Using the Shake Reduction Function to Prevent Camera  
Shake...........................................................................................116  
Taking Pictures Using the Shake Reduction Function..................... 116  
Shooting with the Self-timer............................................................. 118  
Shooting with a Remote Control Unit (Optional).............................. 120  
Taking Pictures Continuously...................................................122  
Continuous Shooting........................................................................ 122  
Interval Shooting.............................................................................. 124  
Multi-exposure ................................................................................. 127  
Recording Movies.......................................................................129  
Changing the Settings for Movie Recording .................................... 129  
Recording Movies ............................................................................ 131  
Interval Movie................................................................................... 133  
Playing Back Movies........................................................................ 135  
Editing Movies.................................................................................. 137  
Shooting Settings  
139  
Setting a File Format..................................................................140  
File Format....................................................................................... 141  
JPEG Recorded Pixels .................................................................... 141  
Color Space ..................................................................................... 142  
Setting the White Balance .........................................................143  
Adjusting the White Balance Manually............................................. 145  
Adjusting the White Balance with Color Temperature ..................... 147  
Correcting Images......................................................................148  
Brightness Adjustment..................................................................... 148  
High Dynamic Range Image Capture .............................................. 149  
Lens Correction................................................................................ 151  
Composition Adjustment.................................................................. 153  
Setting the Image Finishing Tone.............................................155  
Custom Image.................................................................................. 155  
Digital Filter...................................................................................... 159  
Customizing the Button/E-dial Functions................................162  
Setting the E-dials Operation........................................................... 162  
Setting the V/Y Button Operation............................................. 165  
Setting the =/L Button Operation.......................................... 167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12  
Saving Frequently Used Settings .............................................168  
Saving the Settings.......................................................................... 168  
Checking the Saved USER Settings................................................ 171  
Using Saved USER Settings............................................................ 171  
Resetting to Default Settings ........................................................... 172  
Playback Functions and Image Editing  
173  
How to Operate the Playback/Edit Functions..........................174  
Playback Mode Palette Items .......................................................... 174  
Playback Menu Items....................................................................... 175  
Setting the Playback Display Method.......................................176  
Selecting the Playback Functions ............................................177  
Magnifying Images........................................................................... 177  
Displaying Multiple Images .............................................................. 178  
Playing Back Images Continuously.................................................. 181  
Rotating Images............................................................................... 183  
Deleting Multiple Images ...........................................................184  
Deleting Selected Images................................................................ 184  
Deleting a Folder.............................................................................. 185  
Deleting All Images.......................................................................... 186  
Processing Images.....................................................................187  
Changing the Number of Recorded Pixels (Resize) ........................ 187  
Cutting Out Part of the Image (Cropping) ........................................ 188  
Processing Images with Digital Filters ............................................. 189  
Joining Multiple Images (Index) ....................................................... 194  
Developing RAW Images ...........................................................196  
Developing One RAW Image........................................................... 196  
Developing Multiple RAW Images ................................................... 198  
Connecting the Camera to an AV Device.................................200  
Connecting the Camera to a Video Input Terminal.......................... 200  
Setting the Video Output Format ..................................................... 201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13  
Changing Additional Settings  
203  
How to Operate the Set-up Menu..............................................204  
Set-up Menu Items........................................................................... 204  
Camera Settings .........................................................................206  
Setting the Sound Effects, Date and Time, and Display  
Language......................................................................................... 206  
Setting the Monitor and the Menu Displays ..................................... 210  
Battery Settings................................................................................ 214  
Selecting Settings to Save in the Camera (Memory)....................... 215  
Resetting the Camera Settings........................................................ 217  
Checking the Camera Version Information...................................... 218  
File Management Settings .........................................................219  
Formatting an SD Memory Card...................................................... 219  
Protecting Images from Deletion (Protect)....................................... 220  
Setting the Naming System of the Folder ........................................ 221  
Creating New Folders ...................................................................... 222  
Setting the File Name ...................................................................... 223  
Setting the Photographer Information.............................................. 224  
Using an Eye-Fi Card....................................................................... 226  
Setting the DPOF Settings............................................................... 229  
Connecting to a Computer  
231  
Manipulating Captured Images on a Computer.......................232  
Saving Images on a Computer..................................................233  
Setting the USB Connection Mode .................................................. 233  
Connecting the Camera and a Computer ........................................ 234  
Using the Provided Software.....................................................235  
Installing the Software...................................................................... 235  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14  
Using the Flash  
239  
Using the Built-in Flash .............................................................240  
Flash Characteristics in Each Exposure Mode ................................ 240  
Using the Slow-speed Sync Flash ................................................... 240  
Distance and Aperture when Using the Built-in Flash...................... 242  
Using an External Flash (Optional)...........................................243  
Using the P-TTL Auto Flash............................................................. 244  
Using the High-speed Sync Flash.................................................... 245  
Using Flash in Wireless Mode ......................................................... 246  
Connecting an External Flash with an Extension Cord.................... 248  
Using the Contrast Control Sync Flash............................................ 250  
Appendix  
251  
Default Settings ..........................................................................252  
Functions Available with Various Lens Combinations...........259  
Setting the Focal Length.................................................................. 262  
Using the Aperture Ring................................................................... 263  
Cleaning the CMOS Sensor.......................................................264  
(Dust Removal)................................................................................ 264  
Removing Dust with a Blower.......................................................... 265  
Using the GPS Unit.....................................................................267  
Shooting Celestial Bodies (ASTROTRACER) ................................. 268  
Error Messages...........................................................................270  
Troubleshooting .........................................................................273  
Main Specifications....................................................................276  
Index ............................................................................................283  
WARRANTY POLICY ..................................................................290  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15  
Composition of the Operating Manual  
This Operating Manual contains the following chapters.  
1 Before Using Your Camera  
1
2
Explains the provided accessories and the names and functions of the working  
parts.  
2 Getting Started  
Explains your first steps from purchasing the camera to taking pictures. Be  
sure to read this chapter and follow the instructions.  
3
3 Basic Operations  
Explains basic operations for taking and playing back pictures.  
4
4 Shooting Functions  
Explains shooting-related functions.  
5
5 Shooting Settings  
Explains procedures for changing the shooting settings, such as the file  
format.  
6
6 Playback Functions and Image Editing  
7
Explains various operations for playing back and editing images.  
7 Changing Additional Settings  
8
Explains general camera settings and file management settings such as the  
9
8 Connecting to a Computer  
instructions and a general overview of the provided software.  
10  
9 Using the Flash  
Explains how to use the built-in flash and external flashes.  
10Appendix  
Explains troubleshooting and provides various resources.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
16  
The symbols used in this Operating Manual are explained below.  
Indicates reference page numbers explaining a related operation.  
1
Indicates useful information.  
Indicates precautions to take when operating the camera.  
In this manual, the arrow keys of the four-way  
controller are referred to in the following way.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 Before Using Your  
Camera  
Check the package contents and the names and functions  
of the working parts before use.  
Checking the Contents of the Package ..............18  
Names and Functions of the Working Parts ......19  
How to Change Function Settings ......................37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
18  
Checking the Contents of the  
Package  
The following accessories are packaged with the camera.  
Check that all accessories are included.  
1
Hot shoe cover FK  
Eyecup FR  
Body mount cover  
(installed on camera)  
(installed on camera)  
(installed on camera)  
Strap  
O-ST132  
Rechargeable lithium-ion  
battery D-LI109*  
Battery charger  
D-BC109*  
AC plug cord  
USB cable  
I-USB7  
Software (CD-ROM)  
S-SW133  
Operating Manual  
(this manual)  
* The power supply set provided with this camera varies depending on the country or region  
where the camera was purchased. The camera may come with the AA battery holder  
D-BH109 and four AA lithium batteries, instead of the rechargeable lithium-ion battery  
D-LI109 and battery charger D-BC109.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
19  
Names and Functions of the Working  
Parts  
Microphone  
1
Image plane indicator  
AF assist light  
Strap lug  
Lens mount index  
(red dot)  
Mirror  
Self-timer lamp/  
Remote control receiver  
AF coupler  
Lens information  
contacts  
Hot shoe  
Built-in flash  
Diopter adjustment  
lever  
Speaker  
Strap lug  
Viewfinder  
SD Memory Card  
slot  
Monitor  
Card cover  
Terminal cover  
Cable release  
terminal  
Card access  
lamp  
Connection cable  
cover  
Battery cover  
unlock switch  
VIDEO/PC output  
terminal  
Terminal cover  
Tripod socket  
Battery cover  
*
In the second illustration, the camera is shown with the Hot shoe cover FK and  
the Eyecup FR removed.  
If the terminal covers and the connection cable cover are not closed correctly,  
the dust-proof and water-resistant qualities of the camera will not be effective.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                   
20  
Capture Mode  
Here, you can learn which parts are used and how they function when in  
capture mode.  
1
The factory default setting of each part is explained here, but some parts have  
multiple functions and work differently depending on the selected setting.  
1
7
2
3
4
8
9
5
6
a
0
c
d
e
f
g
h
b
1
m (EV Compensation)  
button  
Press to set the EV  
2 d (Green) button  
Press to reset the values  
being adjusted.  
compensation value. (p.92)  
3
4
Shutter release button  
Press to capture images. (p.66)  
Turn the rear e-dial (S)  
after or while pressing the m  
button to change the setting.  
Main switch  
Move to turn the camera on  
and off. (p.57)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
21  
5
Front e-dial (R)  
c
Rear e-dial (S)  
Changes the set value.  
You can change the menu  
when a menu screen is  
displayed. (p.40)  
Sets the shutter speed,  
aperture and EV  
compensation values. (p.90)  
You can change the settings  
when the control panel is  
displayed. (p.39)  
1
6
7
Lens unlock button  
Press to detach a lens. (p.55)  
You can change the menu  
when a menu screen is  
displayed. (p.40)  
Mode dial  
Changes the capture mode.  
(p.82)  
d
=/L button  
8
9
0
a
E (Flash pop-up) button  
Press to pop up the built-in  
flash. (p.71)  
You can select the function of  
the target or to lock the  
exposure value. (p.96, p.167)  
V/Y button  
You can assign a function to  
this button. (p.165)  
e
f
Q (Playback) button  
Switches to playback mode.  
(p.72)  
Focus mode switch  
Changes the focus mode.  
(p.101)  
4 button  
When the control panel or a  
menu screen is displayed,  
press this button to confirm  
the selected item.  
U/i (Live View) button  
Displays the Live View image.  
(p.26)  
When both [AF Active Area]  
and [Contrast AF] are set to  
[Select], press this button to  
enable or disable changing  
the autofocusing (AF) point or  
area. (p.105, p.108)  
Deletes the image during  
Instant Review. (p.66)  
b
M button  
Displays the control panel.  
(p.28) Press again to change  
the type of information  
displayed in standby mode.  
(p.29)  
When the camera is in \  
mode or when the focus is  
locked during Live View, press  
this button to magnify the  
image on the monitor. (p.109)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
22  
g
Four-way controller  
h
3 button  
(2345)  
Displays the [A Rec. Mode 1]  
menu (p.77). Press this button  
when a menu screen is  
displayed to return to the  
previous screen. (p.39)  
Displays the Sensitivity/White  
Balance/Flash Mode/Drive  
Mode setup menu. (p.76)  
1
When the control panel or a  
menu screen is displayed, use  
this to move the cursor or  
change the item to set.  
Playback Mode  
Here, you can learn which parts are used and how they function when in  
playback mode.  
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
0
6
a
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
23  
1
m (EV Compensation)  
7
Rear e-dial (S)  
button  
Use this to magnify an image  
or display multiple images at  
the same time (p.177, p.178).  
When the file format of the last  
captured image is JPEG, and  
its data still remains in the  
buffer memory, press this  
button to save the image in  
RAW format. (p.72)  
8
9
Q (Playback) button  
Switches to capture mode.  
1
4 button  
Confirms the setting you  
selected in the menu or  
playback screen.  
2
3
4
Shutter release button  
Press halfway to switch to  
capture mode.  
0
Four-way controller  
(2345)  
Use this to move the cursor or  
change the item to set in the  
menu or playback screen.  
Press the four-way controller  
(3) in the single image  
Main switch  
Move to turn the camera on  
and off. (p.57)  
Front e-dial (R)  
Use this to display the next or  
previous image. (p.72)  
display to display the playback  
mode palette. (p.174)  
5
6
U/i (Delete) button  
Press to delete images. (p.73)  
a
3 button  
Displays the [Q Playback 1]  
menu (p.175).  
M button  
Changes the type of  
information displayed in  
playback mode. (p.30)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
24  
Monitor Display  
Various information appears on the monitor depending on the status of the  
camera.  
1
The brightness level and the color of the monitor can be adjusted. (p.211)  
Capture Mode  
With this camera, you can take pictures while looking through the  
viewfinder or while viewing the image on the monitor.  
When using the viewfinder, check the status screen displayed on the  
monitor and the viewfinder indicators while shooting. When not using the  
viewfinder, display the Live View image on the monitor while shooting.  
The camera is in “standby mode” when the status screen or the Live View  
image is displayed. Press the M button in standby mode to display the  
“control panel” and change settings. (p.28)  
If you press the M button while the control panel is displayed, you can  
select the type of information displayed in standby mode. (p.29)  
Status Screen  
Custom Image  
Bright  
1/90  
200  
F4.0  
M
M
128  
128  
OK  
MENU Cancel  
OK  
Standby mode  
(status screen)  
Control panel  
Shooting Info Display  
selection screen  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
25  
Status screen  
The settings for shooting with the viewfinder are displayed.  
(All items are displayed here for explanatory purposes. The actual display may differ.)  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
1/2000  
1600  
F5.6  
10  
11  
12  
10  
16  
17 18 19  
20  
13  
15  
10  
14  
10  
21  
25 26 27  
22  
23  
24  
28  
+1.0  
G1A1  
123/999  
1
2
3
4
5
Capture mode (p.82)  
AE Lock (p.96)  
GPS positioning status  
Custom Image (p.155)  
HDR Capture (p.149)/  
Digital Filter (p.159)  
16 Sensitivity (p.87)  
17 Flash Mode (p.68)  
18 AF point (p.104)  
19 Drive Mode (p.76)  
20 White Balance (p.143)  
21 Flash Exposure Compensation  
(p.70)  
6
7
8
9
Focus mode (p.101)  
AE Metering (p.97)  
Shake Reduction (p.116)  
Battery level (p.49)  
22 White Balance fine-tuning (p.144)  
23 Eye-Fi communication status  
(p.226)  
10 Front/rear e-dial guide  
11 Shutter speed  
24 Number of shots during Interval  
Shooting or Multi-exposure  
12 Aperture value  
25 File Format (p.141)  
13 Sensitivity (p.87)  
14 EV Compensation (p.92)/  
27 JPEG Quality (p.142)  
Exposure Bracketing (p.93)  
28 Number of recordable still  
pictures/| button guide  
15 EV bar scale  
* Indicator 3 appears only when the optional GPS unit is attached to the camera  
and is operating. (p.267)  
* Indicator 23 appears only when the Eye-Fi card is in use. M indicates that Eye-  
Fi communication is in standby mode, L indicates that Eye-Fi is not connected,  
and the icon is animated during Eye-Fi communication.  
The status screen will disappear if no operations are made within 30 seconds,  
and will also disappear after 2 seconds, immediately after shooting. Press the  
M button to display it again.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
26  
Live View  
Live View is displayed when the U/i button is pressed. You can capture images  
while checking the composition on the monitor.  
(All items are displayed here for explanatory purposes. The actual display may differ.)  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10  
1
001/999  
15  
11  
12  
13  
16  
17  
18  
EV  
+1.7  
14  
0
EV  
1/2000 F2.8  
1600  
9999  
1/2000 F2.8  
1600  
[
]
[
]
9999  
19 20 21 22 23  
24  
25  
1
2
Capture mode (p.82)  
Flash Mode (p.68)/  
13 Temperature warning  
14 Histogram (p.33)  
Recording Sound Level (p.130)  
15 Number of shots during Interval  
Shooting or Multi-exposure  
3
4
5
6
Drive Mode (p.76)  
White Balance (p.143)  
Custom Image (p.155)  
HDR Capture (p.149)/  
Digital Filter (p.159)  
16 Interval Shooting (p.124)/  
Multi-exposure (p.127)  
17 AF frame  
18 | button guide  
19 AE Lock (p.96)  
20 Shutter speed  
21 Aperture value  
22 EV bar scale  
23 Sensitivity (p.87)  
7
8
9
Focus mode (p.101)  
AE Metering (p.97)  
Shake Reduction (p.116)/  
Movie SR (p.130)  
10 Battery level (p.49)  
11 GPS positioning status  
24 Number of recordable still  
pictures/movie recordable time  
12 Eye-Fi communication status  
(p.226)  
25 Face detection frame  
* Indicator 11 appears only when the optional GPS unit is attached to the camera  
and is operating. (p.267)  
* Indicator 12 appears only when the Eye-Fi card is in use. M indicates that Eye-  
Fi communication is in standby mode, L indicates that Eye-Fi is not connected,  
and the icon is animated during Eye-Fi communication.  
* Indicator 17 is displayed in white. It turns green when the subject is in focus and  
turns red when the subject is not in focus. It is not displayed when the focus  
mode switch is set to \. (p.67)  
* For indicator 25, multiple face detection frames are displayed when [Contrast  
AF] is set to [Face Detection]. A main face detection frame is displayed in yellow  
and other frames in white. (p.106)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
27  
• The Live View image may differ from the actual image captured if the  
brightness of the subject is low or high.  
• If any changes occur in the shooting light source during Live View, the image  
on the monitor may flicker. You can cut down on flicker by setting the power  
frequency in [Flicker Reduction] of the [R Set-up 2] menu to that used in your  
region.  
• If the camera position is changed rapidly during Live View, the image may not  
be displayed with the appropriate brightness. Wait for the display to become  
stable before shooting.  
1
• Noise may appear on the Live View image when used in dark locations.  
• The higher the sensitivity, the more noise and color unevenness may occur in  
the monitor image and/or captured image.  
• If you continue shooting for a prolonged period, the internal temperature of  
the camera may increase, resulting in lower quality images. It is  
recommended that you turn off the camera when not shooting. To prevent the  
image quality from degrading, allow enough time for the camera to cool down  
while shooting with long exposures or recording movies.  
• If the internal temperature of the camera becomes high, l (temperature  
warning) is displayed and Live View may not be available. If this happens,  
stop shooting or use the viewfinder.  
You can change the Live View display settings in [Live View] of the [A Rec.  
Mode 4] menu. (p.107)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
28  
Control panel  
Press the M button in standby mode to display the control panel and change  
settings. (p.38)  
Still picture capture mode  
1
Custom Image  
Bright  
1
2
3
8
4
9
5
6
7
10  
15  
11  
16  
12  
17  
13  
14  
19  
18  
20 21  
128  
C mode  
Exposure Setting  
Program AE  
1
2
22  
10  
24  
3
4
12  
23  
17  
15  
11  
16  
14  
18  
19  
20  
21  
1:15'30"  
1
2
3
Function name  
Setting  
Custom Image (p.155)/  
14 JPEG Recorded Pixels (p.141)/  
Movie Recorded Pixels (p.130)  
15 JPEG Quality (p.142)/  
H mode (p.84)  
Movie Quality Level (p.130)  
4
5
6
7
8
9
Digital Filter (p.159)  
HDR Capture (p.149)  
AF Active Area (p.104)  
AF.A (p.103)  
Distortion Correction (p.151)  
Lateral Chromatic Aberration  
Adjustment (p.151)  
16 Shake Reduction (p.116)/  
Movie SR (p.130)  
17 Contrast AF (p.106)  
18 Destination setting (p.207)  
19 Current date and time (p.60)  
20 SD Memory Card status  
21 Number of recordable still  
pictures/movie recordable time  
10 Highlight Correction (p.148)  
11 Shadow Correction (p.148)  
12 AE Metering (p.97)  
22 Exposure Setting (p.129)  
23 Framerate (p.130)  
13 File Format (p.141)  
24 Recording Sound Level (p.130)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
29  
• If no operations are made within 1 minute in the control panel, the camera  
returns to standby mode.  
• You can change the display color of the status screen and control panel. Set  
in [LCD Display] of the [R Set-up 1] menu. (p.210)  
1
Shooting Info Display  
If you press the M button while the control panel is displayed, you can select  
the type of information displayed in standby mode for when shooting with the  
viewfinder. Use the four-way controller (2345) to select a display type and  
press the 4 button.  
Screen  
Displayed Information  
Display  
Status  
Displays the settings for shooting with the viewfinder. (p.25)  
Screen  
Display Off Nothing is displayed on the monitor.  
Universal Time (UTC) are displayed. Press the shutter release  
button halfway or turn the camera off and on again to return to the  
status screen.  
Electronic  
Compass  
Available only when the optional GPS unit is attached to the camera  
and is operating. (p.267)  
The Shooting Info Display selection screen is not displayed when the mode dial  
is set to C.  
• If [Display Off] is selected, the display setting returns to the status screen  
when the camera is turned off and on again. If you select the check box for  
[Shooting Info Display] in [Memory] of the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu, the  
selected screen display appears the next time the camera is turned on.  
(p.216)  
• The Live View image and the indicators which provide shooting information  
are displayed during Live View shooting. If you do not want to display the  
indicators, you can change the setting in [Live View] of the [A Rec. Mode 4]  
menu. (p.107)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
30  
Playback Mode  
The captured image and shooting information are displayed in the single  
image display of playback mode.  
1Playing Back Images (p.72)  
1
Press the M button to call up the playback information display  
selection screen. Use the four-way controller (2345) to select the type  
of screen display that appears in the single image display and press the  
4 button.  
Standard Innformaation Diisplay  
100-0001  
M
1/2000 F2.8  
200  
Cancel  
MENU  
OK OK  
Single image display  
(Standard Information Display)  
Playback Info Display  
selection screen  
Screen Display  
Displayed Information  
Standard Information  
Display  
The captured image, file format and operation guide  
indicators are displayed.  
Detailed Information  
Display  
Detailed information on how and when the image was  
taken is displayed in two pages. (p.31)  
The captured image and brightness histogram are  
displayed. (p.33)  
Histogram Display  
The captured image and RGB histogram are  
RGB Histogram Display displayed. (p.33)  
Not available during movie playback.  
No Information Display  
Only the captured image is displayed.  
The screen display selected here is displayed the next time the camera is  
switched to playback mode.  
• If you clear the check box for [Playback Info Display] in [Memory] of the [A  
Rec. Mode 4] menu, the Standard Information Display always appears first  
when the camera is turned on. (p.215)  
• If [Bright/Dark Area] (p.176) of the [Q Playback 1] menu is enabled by  
selecting the check box, bright (overexposed) portions blink red, while dark  
(underexposed) portions blink yellow. This information is not displayed in  
Detailed Information Display or RGB Histogram Display.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
31  
Detailed Information Display  
Use the four-way controller (23) to switch between pages.  
(All items are displayed here for explanatory purposes. The actual display may differ.)  
Page 1  
1
Still picture  
1
3
4
5
6
7
100-0001  
2
8
9
29  
30  
13  
1/2000  
F2.8  
50mm  
+1.5  
0
10  
11  
15  
12  
16  
0
0
0
0
14  
18  
17  
21  
+1.0  
G1A1  
19 20  
1600  
22 23 24  
31  
25 26 27 28  
32  
05/05/2013 10:30 AM  
Movie  
3
6
7
100-0001  
10'10"  
2
33  
29  
30  
1/125  
F8.0  
125  
50mm  
0.0  
0
0
0
0
0
10  
11  
15  
8
34  
20  
9
12  
14  
18  
4
21  
G1A1  
23 35 24  
25 26  
32  
05/05/2013 10:30 AM  
Page 2  
1
36  
6
7
100-0001  
2
38  
39  
39  
37  
40  
41  
43  
42  
37  
N
36°45.410'  
0m  
W140°02.000'  
123°  
44  
05/05/2013  
10:00:00  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Rotation information (p.183)  
Captured image  
Capture mode (p.82)  
Digital Filter (p.159)  
DPOF setting (p.229)  
Protect setting (p.220)  
7
8
9
Folder number-File number  
Drive Mode (p.76)  
AE Metering (p.97)  
10 Shutter speed  
11 Lens focal length  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
32  
12 Shake Reduction (p.116)/  
27 Distortion Correction (p.151)  
Movie SR (p.130)  
28 Lateral Chromatic Aberration  
Adjustment (p.151)  
13 Focus mode (p.101)/AF point  
(p.104)/Contrast AF (p.106)  
29 Custom Image (p.155)  
14 Aperture value  
30 Custom Image parameters  
(p.156)  
15 EV Compensation (p.92)  
16 Flash Mode (p.68)  
17 Flash Exposure Compensation  
1
31 Color Space (p.142)  
32 Shooting date and time  
33 Recording time  
(p.70)  
18 Sensitivity (p.87)  
19 HDR Capture (p.149)/  
35 Framerate (p.130)  
Multi-exposure (p.127)  
36 Transferred via Eye-Fi (p.226)  
37 Lens direction  
20 White Balance (p.143)  
21 White Balance fine-tuning (p.144) 38 Photographer (p.225)  
22 File Format (p.141)  
39 Information tampering warning  
23 JPEG Recorded Pixels (p.141)/  
40 Copyright Holder (p.225)  
41 Latitude  
Movie Recorded Pixels (p.130)  
24 JPEG Quality (p.142)/  
Movie Quality Level (p.130)  
43 Longitude  
25 Highlight Correction (p.148)  
44 Universal Coordinated Time  
26 Shadow Correction (p.148)  
* Indicator 36 appears only for images that have been transferred using the Eye-  
Fi card.  
stored.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
33  
Histogram Display/RGB Histogram Display  
Use the four-way controller (23) to switch between the Histogram Display and  
RGB Histogram Display.  
1
2
3
4
2
3
100-0001  
100-0001  
1
4
9
10  
11  
1
1/2000 F2.8  
200  
1/2000 F2.8  
200  
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
Histogram Display  
RGB Histogram Display  
1
Histogram (Brightness)  
Protect setting  
Folder number-File number  
Save RAW Data  
File Format  
7
8
9
Aperture value  
Sensitivity  
Histogram (R)  
2
3
4
5
6
10 Histogram (G)  
11 Histogram (B)  
Shutter speed  
* Indicator 4 appears only when the file format of the last captured image is JPEG,  
and the image can also be saved in RAW format. (p.72)  
Using the Histogram  
A histogram shows the brightness  
distribution of an image. The  
horizontal axis represents brightness  
(dark at the left and bright at the right)  
and the vertical axis represents the  
number of pixels.  
The shape and the distribution of the  
histogram before and after shooting  
tell you whether the exposure level  
(Dark) Brightness(Bright)  
Dark portions Bright portions  
and contrast are correct or not, and let you decide if you need to adjust the  
exposure and take a picture again.  
1Adjusting the Exposure (p.92)  
1Brightness Adjustment (p.148)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
34  
When the image is underexposed, the part to the left is cut off  
(underexposed portions with no detail) and when the image is  
overexposed, the part to the right is cut off (overexposed portions with no  
detail).  
You can set whether to display the bright/dark area warning during capture  
or playback mode.  
1
1Setting the Playback Display Method (p.176)  
1Setting the Display for Instant Review (p.212)  
Distribution of color intensity is displayed for each color in RGB Histogram  
Display. If a color is partially cut off on one side, it indicates that the color  
is under- or overexposed, that the light is very weak or strong in that color,  
or that the white balance is incorrect.  
1Setting the White Balance (p.143)  
Guide Indicators  
The following indicators appear on the monitor to indicate the keys,  
buttons and e-dials that can be operated at that time.  
Example:  
2
3
4
5
Four-way controller (2)  
Four-way controller (3)  
Four-way controller (4)  
Four-way controller (5)  
3 button  
d button  
M button  
m button  
U/i button  
=/L button  
|/Y button  
Shutter release button  
4 button  
R
S
Front e-dial  
Rear e-dial  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
35  
Viewfinder  
When shooting with the viewfinder, the following information appears in  
the viewfinder.  
1
2
1
1
3 4  
5
6
7
8
9
10 11  
12  
13 14 15 16 17 18  
1
2
3
AF frame  
Spot metering frame (p.97)  
Flash indicator (p.71)  
Lit:  
when the flash is available.  
Blinks: when the flash is necessary or is being charged.  
4
5
6
7
Focus mode (p.101)  
Appears when set to \.  
Shutter speed  
Underlined when it can be adjusted.  
Aperture value  
Underlined when it can be adjusted.  
Focus indicator (p.65)  
Lit:  
when the subject is in focus.  
Blinks: when the subject is not in focus.  
8
9
EV bar scale  
Displays the EV compensation values or difference between the  
appropriate and current exposure values in a mode. (p.90, p.92)  
ISO/ISO AUTO (p.87)  
Appears when the sensitivity is displayed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
36  
10 Sensitivity/Remaining image storage capacity  
Underlined when it can be adjusted.  
Displays the number of recordable still pictures (up to “9999”) immediately  
after shooting.  
Displays the compensation value while adjusting the EV compensation.  
11 AE Lock (p.96)  
Appears while the AE Lock function is activated.  
12 Changing AF point (p.105)  
1
Appears when the AF point can be changed.  
13 Multi-exposure (p.127)  
Appears when Multi-exposure is set.  
14 AE Metering (p.97)  
Appears when Center-weighted metering or Spot metering is selected.  
15 Shake Reduction (p.116)  
Appears when the Shake Reduction function is activated.  
16 Flash Exposure Compensation (p.70)  
Appears when the flash exposure compensation value is being adjusted.  
17 EV Compensation (p.92)/Exposure Bracketing (p.93)  
Appears when adjusting the EV compensation or when Exposure  
Bracketing is set.  
18 File Format (p.141)  
Appears when the file format is RAW or RAW+.  
The information is displayed in the viewfinder when the shutter release button  
is pressed halfway, or during the meter operating time (default setting: 10 sec.).  
(p.97)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
37  
How to Change Function Settings  
Function settings can be changed using the direct keys, control panel or  
menus.  
This section explains the basic ways to change function settings.  
1
Using the Direct Keys  
In standby mode, you can set Sensitivity, White Balance, Flash Mode and  
Drive Mode by pressing the four-way controller (2345). (p.76)  
Below, how to set [Flash Mode] is explained as an example.  
1
Press the four-way controller (4)  
in standby mode.  
The Flash Mode setting screen appears.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (45)  
to select a flash mode.  
Auto Flashh Discharge  
0.0  
Cancel  
OK OK  
MENU  
Press the 4 button.  
The camera is ready to take a picture.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
38  
Using the Control Panel  
In standby mode, you can switch to the control panel and change settings.  
Below, how to set [JPEG Quality] is explained as an example.  
1
1
Press the M button in  
standby mode.  
The control panel appears.  
2
3
4
Use the four-way controller  
(2345) to select the item you  
want to change the setting for.  
Custom Image  
Bright  
You cannot select items that cannot be  
changed as a result of current camera  
settings.  
128  
Press the 4 button.  
JPEG Quality  
The setup screen of the selected item  
appears.  
128  
128  
Use the four-way controller (45)  
or rear e-dial (S) to select a  
setting value.  
JPEG Quality  
Items not available with the current  
camera settings cannot be selected.  
Cancel  
OK OK  
MENU  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
39  
5
6
Press the 4 button.  
The camera returns to the control panel.  
Next, set other items.  
1
Press the 3 button or the shutter release button  
halfway.  
The camera is ready to take a picture.  
You can also change the setting by turning the rear e-dial (S) after selecting  
the item you want to change in Step 2 ([Recording Sound Level] for C mode  
can only be set using this operation). Detailed settings such as for Custom  
Image and Digital Filter can be changed after pressing the 4 button.  
Using the Menus  
This section explains how to use the following menus: [A Rec. Mode],  
[C Movie], [Q Playback], [R Set-up] and [A Custom Setting].  
Below, how to set [Slow Shutter Speed NR] in the [A Rec. Mode 3] menu  
is explained as an example.  
1
Press the 3 button in  
standby mode.  
The [A Rec. Mode 1] menu appears on  
the monitor.  
The menus listed below are displayed in  
the following situations.  
When the mode [C Movie 1] menu  
dial is set to C  
In playback  
mode  
[Q Playback 1] menu  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
40  
2
Press the four-way controller (5)  
twice.  
1 2 3 4  
Custom Image  
Digitall Filter  
Each time the four-way controller (5) is  
pressed, the menu will change in the  
following sequence: [A Rec. Mode 2],  
[A Rec. Mode 3], [A Rec. Mode 4],  
[C Movie 1] ... [A Rec. Mode 1].  
HDR Capture  
Image Capture Settings  
AE Meteering  
1
Exit  
MENU  
You can also change the menu by turning  
the rear e-dial (S).  
When the front e-dial (R) is turned to the right, the menu will change  
in the following sequence: [A Rec. Mode 1], [C Movie 1],  
[Q Playback 1], [R Set-up 1], [A Custom Setting 1].  
3
4
5
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select an item.  
1 2 3 4  
High-ISO NR  
Slow Shuttter Speed NR  
Compoositiioon Adjust.  
Shake Reduction  
Input Focaal Length  
Exit  
MENU  
Press the four-way controller  
(5).  
1 2 3 4  
High-ISO NR  
Slow Shutteer Speeed NR  
Compoositiioon Adjust.  
Shake Reduction  
Input Focaal Length  
Available settings are displayed in the  
pop-up menu or submenu.  
Exit  
MENU  
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select a setting.  
1 2 3 4  
High-ISO NR  
Slow Shutter Speed NR  
Compoositiioon Adjust.  
Shake Reduction  
Input Focaal Length  
Press the 3 button to cancel the  
pop-up menu, or return to the previous  
screen.  
Cancel  
OK OK  
MENU  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
41  
6
7
Press the 4 button.  
The setting is saved.  
Press the 3 button if a submenu is  
displayed.  
1
Next, set other items.  
Press the 3 button.  
The screen that was displayed before  
selecting the menu item appears again.  
Your settings may not be saved if the camera is turned off improperly (such as  
by removing the battery while the camera is on).  
• You can select either to display the menu tab selected the last time first, or  
to always display the [A Rec. Mode 1] menu first. (p.213)  
• Refer to the following pages for details on each menu.  
[A Rec. Mode] menu 1p.77  
[C Movie] menu 1p.79  
[Q Playback] menu 1p.175  
[R Set-up] menu 1p.204  
[A Custom Setting] menu 1p.80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
42  
Memo  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Getting Started  
This chapter explains your first steps from purchasing the  
camera to taking pictures. Be sure to read this and follow  
the instructions.  
Attaching the Strap ..............................................44  
Inserting the Battery ............................................45  
Inserting/Removing an SD Memory Card ..........52  
Attaching a Lens ..................................................54  
Adjusting the Viewfinder Diopter .......................56  
Turning the Camera On and Off ..........................57  
Initial Settings .......................................................58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
44  
Attaching the Strap  
1
Pass the end of the strap through  
the strap lug, then secure it on  
the inside of the clasp.  
2
2
Attach the other end of the strap in the same manner as  
described above.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
45  
Inserting the Battery  
The following power supplies can be used with the camera.  
*
• Rechargeable Lithium-ion Battery D-LI109  
*
• AA Battery Holder D-BH109 with four AA batteries  
• AC Adapter Kit K-AC128 (optional)  
* Either one of these is provided with the camera. The provided power supply varies  
depending on the country or region where the camera was purchased. The item not  
provided with the camera is optionally available.  
2
Using the Lithium-ion Battery  
Use the battery charger D-BC109 and the rechargeable lithium-ion battery  
D-LI109 to power the camera.  
Charging the Battery  
When using the battery for the first time or when the battery capacity  
becomes low, recharge the battery.  
Note: AC plug cord “Listed, Type SPT-2 or NISPT-2, 18/2 flexible  
cord, rated 125 V, 7A, minimum 6ft (1.8m)”  
1
Connect the AC plug cord to the battery charger.  
Plug the AC plug cord into the power outlet.  
2
Battery charger  
Indicator lamp  
AC plug cord  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
46  
3
4
Face the 2 mark on the battery  
up, and insert the battery into the  
battery charger.  
First, insert the battery at an angle, as  
shown in the illustration, and then push  
down on the battery until it clicks.  
The indicator lamp lights up when  
charging and turns off when the battery is  
fully charged.  
2
When the battery is fully charged, remove the battery from  
the battery charger.  
• Do not use the Battery Charger D-BC109 to charge batteries other than D-  
LI109. Charging other batteries may cause damage or heating.  
• Replace the battery with a new one in the following cases:  
• If the indicator lamp blinks or does not light after the battery is inserted  
correctly  
• If the battery starts to run down more quickly even after being charged (the  
battery may have reached the end of its service life)  
The maximum charging time is approximately 240 minutes (depends on  
temperature and remaining battery power). Charge in a location where the  
temperature is between 0°C and 40°C.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
47  
Inserting/Removing the Battery  
• Do not open the battery cover or remove the battery while the power is on.  
• Insert the battery correctly. If the battery is inserted incorrectly, it may not be  
removed. Wipe the electrodes of the battery with a soft dry cloth before  
inserting.  
• Be careful as the camera or battery may become hot when the camera is  
used continuously for a long period of time.  
2
• Remove the battery when you will not use the camera for a long while. The  
battery may leak and damage the camera if left installed during prolonged  
periods of non-use. If the removed battery will not be used for six months or  
longer, charge the battery for about 30 minutes before storing it. Be sure to  
recharge the battery every six to twelve months.  
• Store the battery in a location where the temperature will remain below room  
temperature. Avoid locations with high temperatures.  
• The date and time may be reset if you leave the battery out of the camera for  
a long period of time. If this occurs, follow the procedure described in “Setting  
the Date and Time” (p.60) to set the current date and time.  
1
Slide the battery cover unlock  
switch in the direction of the  
arrow (1), and open the battery  
cover (2).  
2
1
2
With the 2 mark facing towards  
outside of the camera, push the  
battery in until it locks into place.  
To remove the battery, push the battery  
lock switch in the direction of the arrow  
(3).  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
48  
3
Close the battery cover.  
The battery cover is locked.  
2
Using the AA Batteries  
When using AA batteries, be sure to use the AA battery holder D-BH109.  
Use four AA lithium batteries, AA Ni-MH rechargeable batteries, or AA  
alkaline batteries.  
Available Batteries  
Characteristics  
AA lithium batteries Recommended when using the camera in cold climates.  
AA Ni-MH  
rechargeable  
batteries  
These are rechargeable and reusable.  
A battery charger that is compatible with the batteries is  
required.  
These are easily obtainable when the batteries you are  
using run out but they may not support all the camera  
functions under certain conditions. Use them in  
AA alkaline batteries  
emergencies or when checking the camera functionality.  
• For precautions when using the batteries, refer to “About the Usage of AA  
Batteries” (p.3).  
• If AA Ni-MH rechargeable batteries with a capacity of approximately  
1000 mAh are used, the batteries may not last for very long. Use Ni-MH  
rechargeable batteries with a large capacity.  
1
Insert the AA batteries according  
to the +/- indicators on the  
battery holder.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
49  
2
3
Open the battery cover.  
Refer to Step 1 on p.47.  
Insert the battery holder into the battery chamber until it  
locks into place, and close the battery cover.  
To use the AA batteries, set the AA battery type in [AA Battery Type] of the [  
Set-up 3] menu before use. (p.214)  
R
2
• Check the orientation of the batteries if the camera does not operate  
properly.  
Battery Level Indicator  
You can confirm remaining battery level by checking the w displayed in  
the status screen or Live View screen.  
Display  
w (green)  
Battery Level  
Battery is full.  
x (green)  
f (orange)  
y (yellow)  
F (red)  
Battery is close to full. (D-LI109 only)  
Battery is running low. (D-LI109 only)  
Battery is almost empty.  
[Battery depleted]  
The camera turns off after displaying the message.  
f, y or F (red) may appear even when the battery level is  
sufficient if the camera is used at low temperatures or when performing  
continuous shooting for a long period of time.  
• Battery performance temporarily decreases as the temperature decreases.  
When using the camera in cold climates, have extra batteries at hand and  
keep them warm in your pocket. The battery performance will return to  
normal at room temperature.  
• Have extra batteries ready when traveling abroad, or taking a lot of pictures.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
50  
Using the AC Adapter  
We recommend the use of the optional AC adapter kit K-AC128 when  
using the monitor for a long time or when connecting the camera to a  
computer or AV device.  
The AC Adapter Kit K-AC128 includes AC Adapter D-AC120, DC Coupler  
D-DC128, and AC plug cord.  
2
1
Make sure that the camera is turned off.  
Open the battery cover.  
2
Refer to Step 1 on p.47.  
Remove the battery if it is inserted in the camera.  
3
4
Pull out the connection cable  
cover (1) on the right of the  
battery cover, and insert the DC  
coupler into the battery chamber  
until it locks into place.  
1
Close the battery cover.  
The connection cable is pulled out from  
the connection cable cover section.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
51  
5
Connect the DC coupler and the AC adapter.  
7
2
5
6
6
7
Connect the AC adapter to the AC plug cord.  
Plug the AC plug cord into the power outlet.  
• Make sure the camera is turned off before connecting or disconnecting the  
AC adapter.  
• Make sure connections are secure between the terminals. SD Memory Card  
or data may be corrupted if the connection to the power supply is lost while  
the card is being accessed.  
• The connection cable will protrude from the connection cable cover on the  
camera while the AC adapter is in use.  
• After removing the DC coupler, return the connection cable cover to its  
original position.  
• When the AC adapter is connected to the camera, W is displayed for the  
battery level indicator.  
• Be sure to read the manual of the AC adapter kit before using the AC adapter.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
52  
Inserting/Removing an SD Memory  
Card  
This camera uses a commercially available SD Memory Card, SDHC  
Memory Card, or SDXC Memory Card.  
Make sure the camera is turned off before inserting or removing the SD  
Memory Card.  
• Do not remove the SD Memory Card while the card access lamp is lit.  
• Do not open the card cover while the camera is in use.  
2
• Use this camera to format (initialize) an SD Memory Card that is unused or  
has been used on other devices. Refer to “Formatting an SD Memory Card”  
(p.219) for details on formatting.  
• Use a high-speed memory card when recording movies. If the writing speed  
cannot keep up with the recording speed, writing may stop during recording.  
1
Make sure that the camera is turned off.  
2
Slide the card cover in the  
direction of the arrow, and then  
lift it to open (12).  
1
2
3
Insert the card all the way with  
the SD Memory Card label facing  
toward the monitor.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
53  
Push the SD Memory Card in once to  
remove.  
2
4
Close the card cover (3), and  
then slide it in the direction of the  
arrow (4).  
4
3
Be sure to fully close the card cover. The camera will not turn on if the card  
cover is open.  
For details on the approximate number of still pictures and amount of time of  
movies that can be recorded on an SD Memory Card, refer to “Approximate  
Image Storage Capacity by Size” (p.282).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
54  
Attaching a Lens  
Attach a proper lens to the camera body.  
When you use one of the following lenses with this camera, all the  
camera’s capture modes are available.  
(a) DA, DA L, D FA, FA J lenses  
(b) Lenses with an s (Auto) position; when used in the s position  
2
• When attaching or removing a lens, choose an environment that is relatively  
free of dirt and dust.  
• Keep the body mount cover on the camera when a lens is not attached.  
• Be sure to attach the lens mount cover and lens cap to the lens after  
removing the lens from the camera.  
• Do not insert any fingers into the camera mount or touch the mirror.  
• The camera body and lens mount incorporate lens information contacts. Dirt,  
dust, or corrosion on the contacts may damage the electrical system. Please  
contact a PENTAX Service Center for professional cleaning.  
• Some functions will be restricted when one of lenses described in (b) is used  
with the aperture ring set to the position other than s, or when a lens other  
than listed above and/or other accessories are used. Refer to “Functions  
Available with Various Lens Combinations” (p.259) for details.  
• If a lens for which the focal length information cannot be automatically  
obtained is used, the [Input Focal Length] screen appears when the camera  
is turned on. Refer to “Setting the Focal Length” (p.262) for details.  
• We assume no responsibility nor liability for accidents, damages and  
malfunctions resulting from the use of lenses made by other manufacturers.  
1
Make sure that the camera is turned off.  
Remove the body mount cover  
2
(
1) and lens mount cover (2).  
Be sure to put the lens down with the lens  
mount side facing upward to protect the  
lens mount from damage when there is  
no lens mount cover on the lens.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
55  
3
4
Align the lens mount index (red  
dots: 3) on the camera and the  
lens, and secure by turning the  
lens clockwise until it clicks.  
After attaching, turn the lens  
counterclockwise to make sure that the  
lens is locked in place.  
3
2
Remove the front lens cap by  
pushing the indicated portions  
inward.  
To remove the lens  
Attach the lens cap first, and then turn the  
lens counterclockwise while holding  
down the lens unlock button (4).  
4
The body mount cover (1) is for preventing scratches and blocking dust when  
shipped. Body Mount Cap K that has a lock on the body is sold separately.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
56  
Adjusting the Viewfinder Diopter  
You can adjust the viewfinder diopter to suit your eyesight.  
The Eyecup FR is attached to the viewfinder portion when the camera  
leaves the factory. The diopter can be adjusted with the eyecup attached.  
However, adjustment is easier with the eyecup removed.  
2
1
Remove the eyecup by pulling it  
out in the direction of the arrow.  
2
Look through the viewfinder, and  
slide the diopter adjustment lever  
left or right.  
Adjust the lever until the AF frame in the  
viewfinder is focused.  
Point the camera at a white wall or other  
bright and consistent surface.  
AF frame  
3
Align the eyecup with the groove on the viewfinder  
eyepiece and push it into the position.  
You can also use the optional Magnifier Eyecup O-ME53 for more precise  
focusing.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
57  
Turning the Camera On and Off  
1
Turn the main switch to [ON].  
The camera turns on.  
Set the main switch to the position [OFF]  
to turn off the camera.  
2
• Always turn the camera off when not in use.  
• The power will automatically turn off when you do not perform any operations  
within a set period of time (Auto Power Off). To reactivate the camera, turn it  
on again or perform any of the following operations.  
• Press the shutter release button halfway.  
• Press the 3 button or M button.  
• [Auto Power Off] is set to [1min.] by default. You can change the setting in  
[Auto Power Off] of the [R Set-up 3] menu. (p.214)  
• To turn the camera on in playback mode, turn the main switch to [ON] while  
holding down the Q button.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
58  
Initial Settings  
The first time the camera is turned on, the [Language/u] screen appears  
on the monitor. Follow the procedure below to set the language displayed  
on the monitor and the current date and time.  
If the [Date Adjustment] screen appears,  
Date Adjuustment  
proceed to “Setting the Date and Time”  
(p.60).  
2
Date Format  
Date  
mm/dd/yy  
24h  
01/01//2013  
00:00  
Time  
Settings complete  
Cancel  
MENU  
Setting the Display Language  
You can set the language in which the menus, error messages, etc. are  
displayed.  
1
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select the desired  
language, and press the 4 button.  
The [Initial Setting] screen appears in the  
Initial SSetting  
selected language.  
Proceed to Step 6 if W (Hometown) does  
English  
New York  
not have to be changed.  
Text Size  
Settings coomplete  
Cancel  
Standard  
MENU  
2
Press the four-way controller (3) to move the frame to W,  
and press the four-way controller (5).  
The [W Hometown] screen appears.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
59  
3
Use the four-way controller (45)  
to select a city.  
Hometown  
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to change the  
region.  
Refer to “List of World Time Cities”  
(p.209) for cities that can be selected as a  
hometown.  
New York  
DST  
Cancel  
OK OK  
MENU  
2
4
5
6
7
Press the four-way controller (3) to select [DST], and use  
the four-way controller (45) to select O (On) or P (Off).  
Press the 4 button.  
The [Initial Setting] screen reappears.  
Press the four-way controller (3) to select [Text Size], and  
press the four-way controller (5).  
Use the four-way controller (23)  
Initial SSetting  
to select [Standard] or [Large],  
English  
and press the 4 button.  
New York  
Selecting [Large] increases the text size  
of the selected menu items.  
Text Size  
Standard  
Large  
Settingss complete  
Cancel  
MENU  
8
Press the four-way controller (3)  
to select [Settings complete], and  
press the 4 button.  
Initial SSetting  
English  
New York  
Text Size  
The [Date Adjustment] screen appears.  
Standard  
Settings coomplete  
Cancel  
OK OK  
MENU  
• If the hometown and the date and time are not set, the [Initial Setting] screen  
or [Date Adjustment] screen will be displayed again the next time the camera  
is turned on.  
You can change the text size from the [  
R
Set-up 1] menu later. In this manual,  
the menu screens hereafter are described with [Text Size] set to [Standard].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
60  
Setting the Date and Time  
Set the current date and time and the display style.  
1
Press the four-way controller  
(5), and use the four-way  
controller (23) to select the date  
format.  
Date Adjuustment  
Date Format  
Date  
mm/dd/yy  
24h  
2
01/01//2013  
00:00  
Time  
Choose [mm/dd/yy], [dd/mm/yy] or  
[yy/mm/dd].  
Settings complete  
Cancel  
OK OK  
MENU  
2
3
4
Press the four-way controller (5), and use the four-way  
controller (23) to select [24h] or [12h].  
Press the 4 button.  
The frame returns to [Date Format].  
Press the four-way controller (3), and press the four-way  
controller (5).  
The frame moves to the month if the date format is set to [mm/dd/yy].  
5
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to set the month.  
Date Adjuustment  
Date Format  
Date  
mm/dd/yy  
24h  
Set the day and year in the same manner.  
Next, set the time.  
01/01/2013  
00:00  
Time  
If you select [12h] in Step 2, the camera  
switches between am and pm depending  
on the time.  
Settings complete  
Cancel  
OK OK  
MENU  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
61  
6
Press the four-way controller (3)  
to select [Settings complete], and  
press the 4 button.  
Date Adjuustment  
Date Format  
Date  
mm/dd/yy  
24h  
05/05//2013  
10:00  
The camera is ready to take a picture.  
Time  
If you set the date and time from the  
menu, the [R Set-up 1] menu reappears.  
In this case, press the 3 button.  
Settings complete  
Cancel  
OK OK  
MENU  
2
• When you press the 4 button in Step 6, the seconds value is set to 0. To  
set the exact time, press the 4 button when the time signal (on the TV,  
radio, etc.) reaches 0 seconds.  
• Pressing the 3 button while setting the date and time cancels the  
settings made up to that point and switches the camera to capture mode.  
• You can change the language and date and time settings from the [R Set-up  
1] menu later.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
62  
Memo  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Basic Operations  
This chapter explains basic operations for shooting by  
setting the mode dial to n (Auto Picture) to have the  
camera select the optimum settings based on the subject.  
For information about advanced functions and settings for  
taking pictures, refer to chapter 4 and onward.  
Basic Shooting Operation ...................................64  
Using the Built-in Flash .......................................68  
Reviewing Images ................................................72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
64  
Basic Shooting Operation  
Letting the Camera Choose the Optimal  
Settings  
This camera features various capture modes, focus modes, and drive  
modes. This section explains how to take pictures by simply pressing the  
shutter release button.  
You can take pictures while looking through the viewfinder or while viewing  
the image on the monitor.  
3
Taking Pictures Using the Viewfinder  
1
Set the mode dial to n.  
The capture mode is set to n mode.  
1Selecting the Appropriate Capture  
Mode (p.82)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
65  
2
Set the focus mode switch to  
l.  
In n mode, the focus mode changes to  
f (Autofocus/Auto) mode.  
1Setting the Focus Mode (p.101)  
3
3
4
Look through the viewfinder to  
view the subject.  
When using a zoom lens, turn the zoom  
ring to the right or left to change the angle  
of view.  
Position the subject inside the AF frame, and press the  
shutter release button halfway.  
The autofocus system operates.  
The focus indicator ] appears and you  
will hear a beep when the subject comes  
into focus (focus lock).  
When set to n mode, the optimal  
capture mode is automatically selected  
from U (Standard), c (Portrait), s  
(Landscape), b (Macro), \ (Moving  
Object), . (Night Scene Portrait), K  
(Sunset), d (Blue Sky) or x (Forest).  
(p.83)  
Flash  
status  
Focus indicator  
The AF assist light turns on in a dark or backlit location. If the flash is  
necessary, the flash status E blinks in the viewfinder. Press the E button  
to pop up the flash.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
66  
5
6
Press the shutter release button fully.  
The picture is taken.  
This action is referred to as “releasing the shutter” or “release”.  
Review the captured image on the monitor.  
The image appears for 1 second on the monitor shortly after it is captured  
(Instant Review).  
The following operations can be performed during Instant Review.  
Available operations  
3
U/i button  
Rear e-dial (S)  
m button  
Deletes the image. (p.73)  
Magnifies the image. (p.177)  
is available). (p.72)  
1Setting the Display for Instant Review (p.212)  
• The beep that sounds when the image is focused can be turned off. (p.206)  
• You can set the camera so that it automatically focuses when the =/L  
button is pressed. (p.167)  
• You can preview the image on the monitor and check the depth of field before  
shooting. (p.114)  
Power zoom functions (Image Size Tracking, Zoom Clip and Auto Zoom Effect)  
are not available with this camera. Use manual zoom.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
67  
Taking Pictures Using Live View  
1
Press the U/i button in Step 3  
on p.65.  
The Live View image is displayed on the  
monitor.  
3
2
Position the subject inside the AF  
frame on the monitor, and press  
the shutter release button halfway.  
The autofocus system operates.  
The AF frame turns green when focused.  
Subsequent steps are the same as  
shooting with the viewfinder.  
1/2000 F2.8  
1600  
[
]
37  
Press the U/i button to end the Live  
View shooting.  
AF frame  
• You can magnify the central area in focus by pressing the 4 button while  
the focus is locked (except when [Contrast AF] is set to [Tracking]). (p.109)  
• In this manual, the explanations and examples are mainly for shooting with  
the viewfinder.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
68  
Using the Built-in Flash  
Use a flash to take pictures in low light or backlit conditions.  
The built-in flash is optimum for a subject at a distance from approx. 0.7 m  
to 5 m. Vignetting (darkening of the corners of the image due to a lack of  
light) may occur when used at a distance closer than 0.7 m (this distance  
varies slightly depending on the lens being used and the sensitivity setting  
(p.242)).  
• When using the built-in flash, remove the lens hood before shooting.  
Vignetting may occur depending on the lens being used and the shooting  
conditions. Refer to “Lens and Built-in Flash” (p.261) for details.  
• The built-in flash always fully discharges when using a lens without an s  
(Auto) position.  
3
For details on the built-in flash and instructions on how to take pictures with an  
external flash, refer to “Using the Flash” (p.239).  
Setting the Flash Mode  
Flash Mode  
Function  
Auto Flash  
Discharge  
Automatically measures the ambient light and  
determines whether to use the flash.  
C
Auto Flash+  
Red-eye Reduction the automatic flash.  
Discharges a pre-flash for red-eye reduction before  
i
E
Flash On  
Discharges the flash for each picture.  
Flash On+  
Red-eye Reduction the main flash.  
Discharges a pre-flash for red-eye reduction before  
F
Sets to a slow shutter speed depending on the  
brightness. When using this to shoot a portrait with  
the sunset in the background, both the person and  
Slow-speed Sync  
G
H
Slow-speed Sync+ Discharges a pre-flash for red-eye reduction before  
Red-eye  
the main flash is discharged with Slow-speed Sync.  
Discharges the flash immediately before closing the  
shutter. Captures moving objects as if they are  
leaving a light trail behind them.  
Trailing Curtain  
Sync  
I
k
You can synchronize an optional external flash  
without using a sync cord. (p.246)  
Wireless Mode  
r
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
69  
The flash modes that can be selected differ depending on the capture  
mode.  
Capture Mode  
n/H  
Selectable Flash Mode  
C/i/E/F/r  
E/F/G/H/I/r  
E/F/k/r  
e/K/c  
b/L/a/p  
The flash does not discharge in the following capture modes:  
C mode  
K (Sunset) or d (Blue Sky) of n mode  
K (Sunset), d (Blue Sky), A (Night Scene), Z (Night Scene HDR), y  
(Backlight Silhouette), U (Candlelight), n (Stage Lighting) or E (Museum)  
of H mode  
3
1
Press the four-way controller (4) in standby mode.  
The Flash Mode setting screen appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller (45)  
to select a flash mode, and press  
Auto Flashh Discharge  
the 4 button.  
The camera is ready to take a picture.  
0.0  
Cancel  
OK OK  
MENU  
Slow-speed Sync and Trailing Curtain Sync slow down the shutter speed. To  
avoid camera shake, either turn on the Shake Reduction function, or use a  
tripod.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
70  
Compensating Flash Output  
You can adjust the flash output in a range of -2.0 to +1.0. The following  
flash compensation values can be set according to the step interval set in  
[1. EV Steps] of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu.  
EV Steps  
1/3 EV  
Selectable Flash Compensation Value  
-2.0, -1.7, -1.3, -1.0, -0.7, -0.3, 0.0, +0.3, +0.7, +1.0  
-2.0, -1.5, -1.0, -0.5, 0.0, +0.5, +1.0  
1/2 EV  
3
1
Press the four-way controller (3) in Step 2 on p.69.  
2
Turn the rear e-dial (S).  
Auto Flashh Discharge  
The flash compensation value is set.  
Press the d button to reset the value to  
0.0.  
+0.7  
Cancel  
OK OK  
MENU  
• When the flash output exceeds its maximum amount, the compensation will  
not be effective even if the compensation value is set to the plus (+) side.  
• Compensating to the minus (-) side may have no effect if the subject is too  
close, the aperture is set to a large opening, or the set sensitivity is high.  
• The flash output compensation is also effective for external flash units which  
support the P-TTL auto flash mode.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
71  
Using the Built-in Flash  
1
Press the E button.  
The built-in flash pops up and begins  
charging. While the flash is charging, E  
blinks in the viewfinder or Live View  
screen.  
When the flash is fully charged, E stops  
blinking and stays lit continuously.  
3
When you do not want the flash to  
discharge, keep the built-in flash retracted.  
2
3
Take a picture.  
The flash discharges.  
When the flash mode is set to C or i, the flash is not discharged if the  
lighting conditions do not require flash for correction even when the flash  
is popped up.  
Push down on the top of the flash  
to retract the built-in flash.  
By default, you cannot take pictures while the built-in flash is being charged. If  
you want to take pictures while charging the built-in flash, set [15. Release  
While Charging] to [On] in the [A Custom Setting 3] menu.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
72  
Reviewing Images  
Playing Back Images  
You can play back captured images with the camera.  
1
Press the Q button.  
The camera switches to the single image  
display of playback mode and the most  
recently captured image (for movies, only  
the first frame) is displayed on the  
monitor.  
3
2
Review the captured image on the monitor.  
Available operations  
Four-way controller (4)/  
Displays the previous image.  
front e-dial (R) to the left  
Four-way controller (5)/  
Displays the next image.  
front e-dial (R) to the right  
m button  
Saves the RAW image (only when the  
data is available).  
• When the file format of the last captured image is JPEG, and its RAW data  
still remains in the buffer memory, you can save the RAW image during  
Instant Review or playback (if [Save RAW Data] is enabled in [Instant  
Review] of the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu (p.212)).  
If the image was captured using any of the following settings, the  
corresponding image listed below is saved.  
• Exposure Bracketing  
• Multi-exposure  
• Interval Shooting  
• HDR Capture  
RAW image of the third image  
RAW image with Multi-exposure  
RAW image for the last captured image  
RAW image with standard exposure  
RAW image without a filter effect  
• Digital Filter  
Images captured with Z (Night Scene HDR) of H mode or Continuous  
Shooting cannot be saved in RAW format.  
• Refer to “Playback Functions and Image Editing” (p.173) for details on the  
playback functions.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
73  
Deleting a Single Image  
You can delete images one by one.  
• Deleted images cannot be restored.  
• Protected images cannot be deleted. (p.220)  
1
Press the Q button, and display an image to delete.  
3
2
Press the U/i button.  
The delete confirmation screen appears.  
3
Press the four-way controller (2)  
to select [Delete], and press the  
100-0001  
4 button.  
The image is deleted.  
Delete  
Cancel  
OK OK  
• You can delete multiple images at once. Refer to “Deleting Multiple Images”  
(p.184) for details.  
• For the images captured with [File Format] (p.141) set to [RAW+], you can  
select the file format to delete in Step 3.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
74  
Memo  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Shooting Functions  
This chapter describes the various basic and advanced  
shooting functions available with this camera.  
How to Operate the Shooting Functions ...........76  
Selecting the Appropriate Capture Mode ..........82  
Setting the Exposure ...........................................87  
Focusing .............................................................101  
Checking the Depth of Field (Preview) .............114  
Using the Shake Reduction Function to Prevent  
Camera Shake ....................................................116  
Taking Pictures Continuously ..........................122  
Recording Movies ..............................................129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
76  
How to Operate the Shooting  
Functions  
You can change capture-related settings using the direct keys, control  
panel, [A Rec. Mode] menu, [C Movie] menu or [A Custom Setting]  
menu.  
For details on how to use the direct keys and menus, refer to “How to Change  
Function Settings” (p.37).  
Direct Keys Setting Items  
Press the four-way controller (2345) in  
standby mode to set the following items.  
4
Key  
Item  
Function  
Page  
p.87  
Sensitivity  
Sets the ISO sensitivity.  
2
Adjusts the color balance to match the  
type of the light source illuminating the  
subject.  
White Balance  
Flash Mode  
p.143  
p.68  
3
4
p.122  
p.118  
p.120  
p.93  
Selects Single Frame, Continuous  
Shooting, Self-timer, Remote Control or  
Exposure Bracketing.  
Drive Mode  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
77  
Rec. Mode Menu Items  
The following items are available in the  
[A Rec. Mode 1-4] menus.  
Press the 3 button in standby mode to  
display the [A Rec. Mode 1] menu.  
Menu  
Item  
Function  
Page  
p.171  
Sets the capture mode when the mode dial  
is set to B or C.  
Exposure Mode *1  
4
Sets the image finishing tone such as color  
and contrast before shooting an image.  
Custom Image *2 *3  
Digital Filter *2  
p.155  
Applies a digital filter effect when taking pictures. p.159  
Enables capturing images with high  
dynamic range.  
HDR Capture *2  
p.149  
File Format *2  
Sets the file format.  
A1  
JPEGRecorded Sets the recording size of images saved in  
Pixels *2  
JPEG format.  
p.140  
Sets the quality of images saved in JPEG  
format.  
JPEG Quality *2  
Color Space  
AE Metering *2  
AF.A *2  
Sets the color space to use.  
Selects the part of the sensor to use for  
measuring brightness and determining  
exposure.  
p.97  
Sets the action for l/k when  
shooting with the viewfinder.  
p.103  
Sets whether to continue to focus on your subject  
based on information from the focus points  
surrounding the selected focus point if your subject p.105  
briefly moves out from the selected focus point when  
the focus point selection mode is set to [Select].  
Expanded Area  
AF  
A2  
*2  
AF Active Area  
Selects the part of the viewfinder to focus on. p.104  
Sets whether to use the AF assist light when  
p.103  
AF Assist Light  
autofocusing in dark locations.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
78  
Menu  
Item  
Function  
Page  
p.151  
Reduces distortions and lateral chromatic  
aberrations occurring due to lens properties.  
Lens Correction *2  
Creates a picture by taking multiple  
exposures and merging them into a single  
image.  
Multi-exposure  
p.127  
A2  
Takes pictures at a set interval from a set  
time.  
Interval Shooting  
p.124  
p.98  
bright and dark areas from occurring.  
*2  
D-Range Settings  
High-ISO NR  
Sets the Noise Reduction setting when  
shooting with a high ISO sensitivity.  
Slow Shutter  
Speed NR  
Sets the Noise Reduction setting when  
shooting with a slow shutter speed.  
p.100  
4
Composition  
Adjust.  
Allows you to adjust the composition of your  
image using the Shake Reduction mechanism.  
A3  
p.153  
p.116  
Shake Reduction *2 Activates the Shake Reduction function.  
Sets the focal length when using a lens for  
Input Focal Length which focal length information cannot be  
obtained.  
p.262  
Sets the Live View display and focus  
method settings.  
Live View  
p.107  
p.212  
p.162  
Instant Review  
Sets the Instant Review display settings.  
E-Dial  
Programming  
For each exposure mode, you can set what  
the front and rear dials control.  
Button  
Customization  
Sets the function of the V/Y button and  
=/L button.  
p.165  
p.215  
p.267  
A4  
Determines which settings to save when the  
power is turned off.  
Memory  
GPS  
Sets the functions for when the optional  
GPS unit is attached to the camera.  
Saves the current camera settings as A  
Save USER Mode mode so you can use them by setting the  
p.168  
mode dial to B or C.  
*1 Appears only when the mode dial is set to B or C.  
*2 Can also be set through the control panel.  
*3 When the mode dial is set to H, [Scene Mode] appears instead.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
79  
Movie Menu Items  
The following items are available in the [C Movie 1] menu.  
Press the 3 button when the mode dial is set to C to display the  
[C Movie 1] menu.  
Menu  
Item  
Function  
Page  
Selects the movie exposure mode  
from e, c, or a mode.  
Exposure Setting *1  
Sets the number of recorded pixels  
and size of the movie.  
Recorded Pixels *1  
Framerate *1  
Sets the number of frames shot per  
second.  
4
p.129  
C1  
Quality Level *1  
Sets the quality level of the movie.  
Recording Sound Level *1 Sets the microphone sensitivity.  
Activates the Movie Shake Reduction  
Movie SR *1  
function.  
Takes still pictures at a set interval  
Interval Movie  
from a set time and saves it as a  
single movie file.  
p.133  
*1 Can also be set through the control panel.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
80  
Custom Setting Menu Items  
The following items of the [A Custom Setting 1-3] menus enable you to  
make the best use of the camera.  
Menu  
Item  
1. EV Steps  
Function  
Page  
p.92  
Sets the adjustment steps for  
exposure.  
sensitivity.  
2. Sensitivity Steps  
p.88  
p.97  
p.96  
3. Meter Operating Time  
4. AE-L with AF Locked  
Sets the meter operating time.  
Sets whether to lock the exposure  
value when the focus is locked.  
4
Sets whether to link the exposure  
and AF point in the focusing area  
when [AE Metering] is set to [Multi-  
segment].  
A1  
5. Link AE and AF Point  
p.97  
Sets the order for Exposure  
Bracketing shooting.  
6. Bracketing Order  
p.93  
p.95  
Sets whether to shoot three frames  
with one release when using  
Exposure Bracketing.  
7. One-Push Bracketing  
Sets the operation when pressing the  
8. Bulb (B) Mode Options  
9. WB When Using Flash  
p.91  
shutter release button in  
p
mode.  
Sets the white balance setting when  
using the flash.  
p.145  
Sets whether to adjust the tungsten  
light color tone when the white  
balance is set to F (Auto White  
Balance).  
10. AWB in Tungsten Light  
11. Color Temperature  
Steps  
Sets the adjustment steps for color  
temperature.  
A2  
p.147  
p.102  
Sets the action priority for when the  
12. AF.S Setting  
13. AF.C Setting  
focus mode is set to  
l
and the  
shutter release button is fully pressed.  
Sets the action priority for  
Continuous Shooting when the  
focus mode is set to k.  
p.103  
p.121  
14. AF with Remote  
Control  
Sets whether to use autofocus when  
shooting with a remote control unit.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
81  
Menu  
Item  
Function  
Page  
p.71  
15. Release While  
Charging  
Sets whether to release the shutter  
while charging the built-in flash.  
Sets the built-in flash discharge  
method in wireless mode.  
16. Flash in Wireless Mode  
p.247  
p.213  
Sets whether to save the last menu  
tab displayed on the monitor and to  
display it again the next time the  
3 button is pressed.  
17. Save Menu Location  
Enables Catch-in Focus shooting  
when a manual focus lens is  
attached, and the shutter is  
released automatically when the  
subject comes into focus.  
18. Catch-in Focus  
p.113  
p.112  
A3  
4
Allows you to precisely fine tune  
your lenses with the camera’s  
autofocus system.  
19. AF Fine Adjustment  
20. Using Aperture Ring  
Reset Custom Functions  
Sets whether to enable shutter  
release when the lens aperture ring p.263  
is set to a position other than s.  
Resets all the settings in the [  
A
Custom Setting 1-3] menus to the  
defaults.  
p.217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
82  
Selecting the Appropriate Capture  
Mode  
This camera features various capture modes, enabling you to take  
pictures with settings suited for your photographic vision.  
In this manual, the capture modes are referred to as follows.  
Capture Mode  
Characteristics  
Page  
Automatically selects the optimal capture  
mode for the subject.  
n (Auto Picture) mode  
Lets you choose the capture mode from  
various scene styles.  
H (Scene) mode  
p.84  
Exposure modes  
(e/K/b/c/L/a/p)  
Changes the shutter speed and aperture  
value, and takes pictures.  
p.86  
4
C (Movie) mode  
Records a movie.  
p.131  
Lets you capture images with the saved  
camera settings. Up to two settings can  
be saved.  
A modes (B/C)  
p.168  
1
Turn the mode dial to set the  
desired capture mode to the dial  
indicator.  
Dial indicator  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
83  
The selected capture mode is displayed  
for 3 seconds on the monitor (guide  
display).  
Program  
Automatic Exposure  
You can set the camera to not display the guides in [LCD Display] of the  
[R Set-up 1] menu. (p.210)  
Auto Picture Modes  
4
When set to n (Auto Picture) mode, the camera automatically selects  
the optimal mode from the following capture modes for the subject.  
Mode  
Characteristics  
Standard  
This mode is selected when none of the following modes apply.  
U
For capturing portraits. Reproduces a healthy and bright skin  
tone.  
Portrait  
c
For capturing landscape views. Increases color saturation  
and produces a vivid color image.  
Landscape  
Macro  
s
b
For capturing tiny objects at close focus range like flowers,  
coins, jewelry, and more.  
Moving  
Object  
For capturing images of fast moving subjects, such as at  
sporting events.  
\
For capturing images of people in low light conditions, such as  
dusk or at night.  
Night  
Scene  
Portrait  
Even though the flash is used, the camera will use slow shutter  
speeds so the background areas beyond the flash reach will  
also appear correctly exposed in the picture (Slow-speed Sync  
(p.240)). To prevent camera shake, either turn on the Shake  
Reduction function, or mount the camera on a tripod.  
.
Sunset  
For capturing sunrises or sunsets in beautiful, vivid color.  
K
For capturing images of blue sky. Produces a more  
impressive deep blue.  
Blue Sky  
d
Enhances colors of trees and sunbeams through foliage and  
produces a vivid color image.  
Forest  
x
The autofocus mode is fixed to f when shooting with the viewfinder.  
(p.103) If the camera determines that \ is the optimal mode, the autofocus  
mode is fixed to k, while l is used for all other modes.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
84  
Scene Modes  
When set to H (Scene) mode, you can choose from the following  
shooting scenes.  
Mode  
Characteristics  
For capturing portraits. Reproduces a healthy and bright skin tone.  
Portrait  
c
For capturing landscape views. Increases color saturation and  
produces a vivid color image.  
Landscape  
Macro  
s
For capturing tiny objects at close focus range like flowers,  
coins, jewelry, and more.  
b
For capturing images of fast moving subjects, such as at  
sporting events.  
The drive mode is fixed to [Continuous Shooting (Hi)].  
Moving  
Object  
\
4
For capturing images of people in low light conditions, such as  
dusk or at night.  
Even though the flash is used, the camera will use slow shutter  
speeds so the background areas beyond the flash reach will also  
appear correctly exposed in the picture (Slow-speed Sync  
(p.240)). To prevent camera shake, either turn on the Shake  
Reduction function, or mount the camera on a tripod.  
Night  
Scene  
Portrait  
.
Sunset  
For capturing sunrises or sunsets in beautiful, vivid color.  
K
For capturing images of blue sky. Produces a more impressive  
deep blue.  
Blue Sky  
d
Enhances colors of trees and sunbeams through foliage and  
produces a vivid color image.  
Forest  
x
Night  
Scene  
Used for shooting at night. Use a tripod or flat surface to  
prevent camera shake blur.  
A
Night  
Scene  
HDR  
Generates a single HDR image with less noise from 3 images  
(-3 EV, Standard, and +3 EV) captured in dim lighting.  
The file format is fixed to [JPEG].  
Z
Night Snap For taking snapshots in poorly lit place.  
l
For capturing images of food. Saturation will be rather high to  
make it look appetizing.  
Food  
K
For capturing moving pets.  
The drive mode is fixed to [Continuous Shooting (Hi)].  
Pet  
Z
R
For capturing moving kids. Reproduces healthy and bright skin tone.  
The drive mode is fixed to [Continuous Shooting (Hi)].  
Kids  
Surf &  
Snow  
For capturing images of dazzling backgrounds, such as snowy  
mountains.  
Q
y
Backlight  
Silhouette  
Produces a silhouette image of subject in backlight condition.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                   
85  
Mode  
Characteristics  
Candlelight For capturing scenes in candlelight.  
Stage  
Lighting  
U
n
E
For capturing moving subjects in poorly lit place.  
Museum  
For capturing images in places where a flash is prohibited.  
The flash is deactivated in K, d, A, Z, y, U, n, and E modes. To  
prevent camera shake, either turn on the Shake Reduction function, or mount  
the camera on a tripod.  
When shooting with the viewfinder, the autofocus mode is automatically set  
according to the selected shooting scene. (p.103)  
4
Selecting a Scene Mode  
1
Set the mode dial to H.  
The camera switches to the H mode  
status screen.  
1/125  
200  
F4.0  
128  
2
3
Press the M button.  
The icon for the currently selected capture mode appears in the control  
panel.  
Use the four-way controller  
(2345) to select [Scene  
Scene Mode  
Portrait  
Mode], and press the 4 button.  
The Scene Mode selection screen  
appears.  
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
86  
4
Use the four-way controller  
(2345) or rear e-dial (S) to  
choose a scene mode, and press  
the 4 button.  
Portrait  
For cappturinngg portrraits.  
Reproduces aa healthy  
and brightt skinn tone  
The camera returns to the control panel  
and is ready to take a picture.  
ġ
Cancel  
OK OK  
MENU  
When the 3 button is pressed while  
the mode dial is set to H, the item [Scene  
Mode] appears on the [A Rec. Mode 1]  
menu. Press the four-way controller (5) to  
display the Scene Mode selection screen  
and you can select a scene mode in the  
same way as described in Step 4.  
1 2 3 4  
Scene Mode  
Digitall Filter  
HDR Capture  
Image Capturre Settings  
AE Metering  
4
Exit  
MENU  
Exposure Modes  
Use the following exposure modes to change the shutter speed and  
aperture value.  
Mode  
Characteristics  
Page  
Automatically sets the shutter speed and  
aperture value to obtain a proper exposure  
according to the program line.  
Program  
Automatic Exposure  
e
Sensitivity Priority  
Lets you set the desired sensitivity to suit  
K
b
Automatic Exposure the brightness of the surroundings.  
Shutter Priority Lets you set the desired shutter speed for  
Automatic Exposure expressing subject movement.  
p.89  
Aperture Priority  
Lets you set the desired aperture value for  
c
Automatic Exposure controlling the depth of field.  
Shutter & Aperture Automatically sets the sensitivity to obtain a  
Priority  
proper exposure with the set shutter speed  
L
Automatic Exposure and aperture value.  
Lets you set the sensitivity, shutter speed, and  
aperture value to match your photographic vision.  
Manual Exposure  
Bulb Exposure  
a
p
Lets you capture images that require slow shutter  
speeds such as fireworks and night scenes.  
p.91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
87  
Setting the Exposure  
Setting the Sensitivity  
You can set the sensitivity to suit the brightness of the surroundings.  
The sensitivity can be set to [ISO AUTO] or within a sensitivity range  
equivalent to ISO 100 to 51200. The default setting is [ISO AUTO].  
1
Press the four-way controller (2) in standby mode.  
The Sensitivity setting screen appears.  
4
2
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select [ISO AUTO] or [ISO].  
100 - 3200  
6400  
Sets the range to be  
adjusted automatically.  
ISO AUTO  
ISO  
Sets a fixed value.  
Cancel  
OK OK  
MENU  
3
4
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to change the sensitivity value.  
For [ISO AUTO], turn the front e-dial (R) to set the minimum  
sensitivity.  
Press the 4 button.  
The camera is ready to take a picture.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
88  
• In L mode, or Z (Night Scene HDR)/l (Night Snap)/n (Stage Lighting)  
of H mode, the sensitivity is fixed to [ISO AUTO (up to ISO 6400 for H  
mode)].  
• In K or p mode, [ISO AUTO] is not displayed. If the mode dial is set to p,  
the sensitivity is set to the last fixed value. If the mode dial is set to a when  
the sensitivity is set to [ISO AUTO], the camera operates in L mode.  
• More noise may appear in captured images if a higher sensitivity is set. You  
can reduce image noise by using Noise Reduction. Set in [High-ISO NR] of  
the [A Rec. Mode 3] menu. (p.98)  
• You can select whether to set the sensitivity in increments of 1 EV or in  
accordance with the EV step setting for exposure (p.92). This can be set in  
[2. Sensitivity Steps] of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
89  
Changing the Exposure Mode  
This camera features the following exposure modes.  
The settings available for each exposure mode are as follows.  
z: Available #: Restricted ×: Not available  
Change  
Change  
Change  
EV  
Exposure Mode  
Shutter Speed Aperture Value Sensitivity Compensation  
*1  
*1  
e
Program Automatic Exposure  
#
#
z
z
z
Sensitivity Priority  
Automatic Exposure  
K
×
×
z*2  
Shutter Priority  
Automatic Exposure  
b
c
z
×
×
z
z
×
z
z
z
4
Aperture Priority  
Automatic Exposure  
z
z
L Shutter & Aperture Priority  
z
Automatic Exposure  
a
p
Manual Exposure  
Bulb Exposure  
z
z
z
z*3  
z*2  
z
×
×
*1 In [E-Dial Programming] of the [  
A
Rec. Mode 4] menu, you can make the setting so that the  
shutter speed and/or aperture value can be changed by turning the front/rear e-dial. (p.162)  
*2 [ISO AUTO] is not available.  
*3 If the mode dial is set to a when the sensitivity is set to [ISO AUTO], the camera operates  
in L mode.  
1
Set the mode dial to e, K, b,  
c, L, a or p.  
R or S appears on the status  
screen for the value that can be changed.  
1/2000  
1600  
F2.8  
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
90  
The value that can be changed is  
underlined in the viewfinder.  
During Live View, 5 appears for the value  
that can be changed.  
1/2000 F2.8  
1600  
[
]
128  
2
3
Turn the rear e-dial (S).  
The aperture value can be changed in  
c, L, a, or p mode.  
4
The sensitivity can be changed in K  
mode.  
Turn the front e-dial (R).  
The shutter speed can be changed in b,  
L, or a mode.  
In a mode, the difference from the proper  
exposure is displayed in a bar scale while  
the shutter speed or aperture value is  
adjusted. The exposure value blinks red  
when the difference from the proper  
exposure is ±3.0 or larger.  
1/125  
200  
F5.6  
128  
• The proper exposure may not be obtained with the selected shutter speed  
and aperture value when the sensitivity is set to a fixed value (p.87).  
• For each exposure mode, you can set the functions for when the front/rear e-  
dial is turned or the d button is pressed. Set in [E-Dial Programming] of the  
[A Rec. Mode 4] menu. (p.162)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
91  
Bulb Shooting  
This is useful when capturing images of night scenes and fireworks which  
require long exposures.  
1
Set the mode dial to p (Bulb).  
2
Press the shutter release button.  
The shutter remains open as long as the shutter release button is kept  
pressed.  
3
Take your finger off the shutter release button.  
4
Exposure ends.  
In p mode, the following functions are not available.  
- Continuous Shooting  
- EV Compensation  
- Interval Shooting  
- Shake Reduction  
- Exposure Bracketing  
- AE Lock  
- HDR Capture  
• You can set the operation of the shutter release button in p mode in [8. Bulb  
(B) Mode Options] of the [A Custom Setting 2] menu.  
Exposure continues while the shutter release button is  
pressed. (default setting)  
Mode1  
Exposure starts with the first press of the shutter release button  
Mode2  
and ends with the second press of the shutter release button.  
• More noise may appear in captured images if a slower shutter speed is set.  
You can reduce image noise by using Noise Reduction. Set in [Slow Shutter  
Speed NR] of the [A Rec. Mode 3] menu. (p.100)  
• Use a tripod and the optional cable switch or an optional remote control unit  
to prevent camera shake during Bulb shooting.  
• We recommend using the optional AC adapter kit as the battery drain is high  
during Bulb shooting.  
• When the optional GPS unit is attached and [Action in B Mode] is set to  
[ASTROTRACER] in [GPS] of the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu, the  
ASTROTRACER function is activated in p mode. (p.268)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
92  
Adjusting the Exposure  
This allows you to deliberately overexpose (brighten) or underexpose  
(darken) your picture.  
The compensation value can be set between -5 and +5 EV (-2 and +2 EV  
in C mode). The value that can be set varies according to the step interval  
set in [1. EV Steps] of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu.  
EV Steps  
1/3 EV  
Exposure Compensation Value  
±0.3, ±0.7, ±1.0, ±1.3, ±1.7, ±2.0, ±2.3, ±2.7, ±3.0, ±3.3, ±3.7, ±4.0,  
±4.3, ±4.7, ±5.0  
±0.5, ±1.0, ±1.5, ±2.0, ±2.5, ±3.0, ±3.5, ±4.0, ±4.5, ±5.0  
1/2 EV  
4
1
Press the m button (1), and  
then turn the rear e-dial (S)  
(2).  
1
The exposure is adjusted.  
2
m and the compensation value are  
displayed in the status screen, viewfinder,  
and Live View screen during adjustment.  
1/90  
200  
F4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
93  
EV  
+1.7  
0
EV  
1/2000 F2.8  
1600  
128  
Available operations  
m button  
Starts/ends selecting the compensation value.  
d button  
Resets the compensation value to the default  
setting.  
4
• EV Compensation is not available in p mode.  
• The set compensation value is not canceled by turning the camera off or by  
switching to another capture mode.  
Changing the Exposure Automatically when Shooting  
(Exposure Bracketing)  
You can take three consecutive pictures at three different exposure levels.  
Standard exposure  
Underexposure  
Overexposure  
Set the bracketing order in [6. Bracketing Order] of the [A Custom Setting  
1] menu.  
0 – +  
– 0 +  
+ 0 –  
0 + –  
Standard Underexposed Overexposed (default setting)  
Underexposed Standard Overexposed  
Overexposed Standard Underexposed  
Standard Overexposed Underexposed  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
94  
Exposure Bracketing is not available in the following situations.  
• when p mode, or \ (Moving Object)/Z (Night Scene HDR)/Z (Pet)/R  
(Kids) of H mode is set  
• when Interval Shooting, Multi-exposure or HDR Capture is set  
1
Press the four-way controller (5) in standby mode.  
The Drive Mode setting screen appears.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (45) to select l.  
Press the four-way controller  
Exposure Bracketing  
(3), and set the bracket value.  
4
The value that can be set varies  
according to the step interval set in [1. EV  
0.7EV  
Steps] of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu.  
(p.92)  
Cancel  
OK OK  
MENU  
Available operations  
Rear e-dial (S) to the right (y) Increases the bracket value.  
Rear e-dial (S) to the left (f)  
Reduces the bracket value.  
m button  
Rear e-dial (S)  
Adjusts the EV compensation value  
(when taking pictures in either under-  
or overexposed direction only).  
d button  
Resets the compensation value to the  
default setting.  
4
5
Press the 4 button.  
The camera is ready to take a series of pictures.  
Press the shutter release button halfway.  
The EV compensation value is displayed in the status screen, viewfinder,  
and Live View screen when the subject comes into focus.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
95  
6
Press the shutter release button fully.  
Press and hold the shutter release button until three pictures are taken.  
The pictures will be taken according to the order set in [6. Bracketing  
Order] of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu.  
• When the focus mode is set to l, the focus position is locked in the first  
image and is used for subsequent images.  
• When you take your finger off the shutter release button during Exposure  
Bracketing, the exposure setting will remain effective for twice the amount of  
the meter operating time (p.97) (default setting is about 20 seconds) and you  
can take a picture at the next compensation value. After about twice the  
amount of the meter operating time elapses, the camera returns to settings  
for taking the first image.  
• When [7. One-Push Bracketing] of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu is set to  
[On], even if the shutter release button is not continuously pressed, three  
pictures are automatically taken with one press of the shutter release button.  
• Select [Single Frame Shooting] in the Drive Mode setting screen to cancel  
Exposure Bracketing. The setting is canceled automatically when the camera  
is turned off if you clear the check box for [Drive Mode] in [Memory] of the [A  
Rec. Mode 4] menu. (p.215)  
4
• You can combine Exposure Bracketing with the built-in flash or an external  
flash (P-TTL auto only) to continuously change only the flash output.  
• If you use Exposure Bracketing frequently, you can assign it to the |/Y  
button. (p.165)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
96  
Locking the Exposure Before Shooting (AE  
Lock)  
AE Lock is a function that locks the exposure (brightness) prior to taking a  
picture. Use this when the subject is too small to obtain a proper exposure  
or is backlit.  
1
Assign [AE Lock] to the =/L button.  
Refer to “Setting the =/L Button Operation” (p.167) for details.  
2
Set the exposure, and press the  
=/L button.  
4
The camera locks the exposure at that  
instant.  
@ is displayed in the status screen,  
viewfinder, and Live View screen while  
the AE Lock is engaged.  
Press the =/L button again to  
cancel AE Lock.  
• The exposure remains locked in the following situations.  
• while the =/L button is pressed  
• while the shutter release button is pressed halfway  
• for twice the amount of the meter operating time (p.97)  
• You will hear a beep when AE Lock is activated and deactivated. The beep  
can be turned off. (p.206)  
• AE Lock is not available in p mode.  
• If you want to also lock the exposure when the focus is locked, set [4. AE-L  
with AF Locked] of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu to [On].  
• When a mode is set, if the shutter speed or aperture value is changed while  
AE Lock is engaged, the combination of shutter speed and aperture value  
changes while the exposure remains the same.  
• When using a zoom lens whose maximum aperture varies depending on the  
focal length, the combination of shutter speed and aperture value changes  
depending on the zooming position even while AE Lock is engaged.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
97  
Selecting the Metering Method  
Choose the part of the sensor to use for measuring brightness and  
determining exposure.  
The sensor meters the brightness in multiple zones. (default setting)  
Multi-  
segment  
L
M
Even in backlit locations, this mode automatically determines what level  
of brightness is in which portion and automatically adjusts exposure.  
Metering is weighted at the center of the sensor.  
The sensitivity increases at the center and no automatic  
adjustment is performed even during backlit scenes.  
Center-  
weighted  
The brightness is measured only within a limited area at the center  
of the sensor. You can use this in combination with AE Lock (p.96)  
when a subject is too small to obtain a correct exposure.  
N Spot  
4
1
Press the M button in standby mode.  
The control panel appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select [AE  
Metering], and press the 4 button.  
The [AE Metering] screen appears.  
3
Use the four-way controller (45)  
to select a metering method, and  
AE Metering  
Multi-ssegment  
press the 4 button.  
The camera returns to the control panel.  
Cancel  
OK OK  
MENU  
• You can also change the setting from the [A Rec. Mode 1] menu.  
• Exposure metering is performed immediately after the camera is turned on or  
when the capture mode is changed. Set the length of meter operating time in  
[3. Meter Operating Time] of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu. Select from  
[10sec.] (default setting), [3sec.] or [30sec.].  
• In [5. Link AE and AF Point] of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu, you can link  
the exposure and AF point in the focusing area when L is selected.  
Exposure for multi-segment metering is determined regardless of  
the AF point. (default setting)  
Off  
On Exposure for multi-segment metering is adjusted according to the AF point.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
98  
Reducing the Image Noise (Noise Reduction)  
When shooting with a digital camera, image noise (image roughness or  
unevenness) becomes noticeable in the following situations.  
• when shooting with a high sensitivity setting  
• when shooting with long exposures  
• when the temperature of the CMOS sensor is high  
You can reduce image noise by using Noise Reduction.  
Pictures cannot be taken while the camera is performing a noise reduction  
process. In particular, if you use [Slow Shutter Speed NR], it may take more  
time to process.  
4
High-ISO NR  
Reduces noise at high ISO sensitivity settings.  
1
Select [High-ISO NR] in the [A Rec. Mode 3] menu, and  
press the four-way controller (5).  
The [High-ISO NR] screen appears.  
2
Press the four-way controller  
(5), and use the four-way  
controller (23) to select a  
High-ISO NR  
Auto  
Low  
Medium  
setting.  
High  
Custom  
Off  
Cancel  
OK OK  
MENU  
Applies Noise Reduction at optimally calculated levels  
throughout ISO range. (default setting)  
Auto  
Applies Noise Reduction at constant chosen level  
throughout ISO range.  
Low/Medium/High  
Applies Noise Reduction at user-defined levels for  
each ISO setting.  
Custom  
Off  
Does not apply Noise Reduction at any ISO setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
99  
3
4
Press the 4 button.  
If you select [Auto], [Low], [Medium], [High] or [Off], proceed to Step 7.  
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Setting], and  
press the four-way controller (5).  
The screen to set the noise reduction level according to the ISO  
sensitivity appears.  
5
Use the four-way controller (23)  
High-ISO NR  
1 2  
to select a sensitivity value, and  
use the four-way controller (45)  
to set the level of noise reduction  
which is applied to the selected  
sensitivity value.  
100  
200  
400  
800  
4
1600  
3200  
6400  
Reset  
MENU  
The sensitivity values displayed vary  
according to the [1. EV Steps] and  
[2. Sensitivity Steps] settings made in the [A Custom Setting 1] menu.  
Available operations  
Rear e-dial (S)  
Switches between [High-ISO NR 1] and [High-ISO  
NR 2].  
d button  
Resets the set value to the default setting.  
6
7
Press the 3 button.  
The screen that was displayed in Step 2 appears again.  
Press the 3 button twice.  
The camera is ready to take a picture.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
100  
Slow Shutter Speed NR  
Reduces noise during long exposures.  
1
Select [Slow Shutter Speed NR] in the [A Rec. Mode 3]  
menu, and press the four-way controller (5).  
2
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select a setting, and press the  
4 button.  
1 2 3 4  
High-ISO NR  
Slow Shutter Speed NR  
Compoositiioon Adjust.  
Shake Reduction  
Input Focaal Length  
4
Cancel  
OK OK  
MENU  
Determines conditions such as shutter speed, sensitivity, and the  
camera’s internal temperature, and automatically applies Noise  
Reduction as necessary. (default setting)  
Auto  
Applies Noise Reduction when the shutter speed exceeds 1  
second.  
On  
Off  
Does not apply Noise Reduction.  
3
Press the 3 button.  
The camera is ready to take a picture.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
101  
Focusing  
Setting the Focus Mode  
Set the focus mode switch to l, A, or \.  
4
The autofocus methods for shooting with the viewfinder differ from those  
for shooting with Live View.  
TTL phase-matching autofocus:  
Select from l, k, or f mode which  
enables automatically switching between l  
Shooting with the viewfinder  
Shooting with Live View  
and k. (p.102) Set the focusing point in [AF  
Active Area]. (p.104)  
Faster autofocus performance than “contrast  
detection AF” is possible.  
Contrast detection AF:  
Face detection and tracking are available.  
(p.106)  
The camera behaves the same whether the  
focus mode switch is set to l or A.  
Refer to “Adjusting the Focus Manually (Manual Focus)” (p.110) for details  
on \ mode.  
If [Enable AF1] or [Enable AF2] is assigned to the =/L button, you can  
set the camera so that pressing the=/L button focuses automatically, in  
the same way as pressing the shutter release button halfway. By default, both  
pressing the shutter release button halfway and using the =/L button  
can perform autofocus. (p.167)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
102  
Autofocus Modes when Shooting with the Viewfinder  
The following autofocus modes can be selected when shooting with the  
viewfinder.  
When the shutter release button is pressed halfway and the  
subject comes into focus, the focus is locked (focus lock) at  
that position. If the subject is outside the focusing area, focus  
the camera on the subject in the focusing area, lock the focus  
at that position (focus lock), and then recompose your picture.  
• The focus mode is fixed to l in c (Portrait)/s (Landscape)/  
b (Macro)/. (Night Scene Portrait)/x (Forest)/A (Night  
Scene)/Z (Night Scene HDR)/K (Food)/K (Sunset)/Q (Surf  
& Snow)/y (Backlight Silhouette)/U (Candlelight)/E  
(Museum) of H mode.  
l
Single mode  
4
• The AF assist light turns on as necessary.  
• You can set the action priority for when the shutter release  
button is pressed fully in [12. AF.S Setting] of the [A Custom  
Setting 2] menu.  
The shutter cannot be released until the subject is  
in focus. (default setting)  
Focus-  
If the subject is too close to the camera, move back  
priority  
and take the picture. If the subject is difficult to  
focus, adjust the focus manually.  
Release- The shutter can be released even if the subject is  
priority  
not in focus.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
103  
The subject is kept in focus by continuous adjustment while the  
shutter release button is pressed halfway. The focus indicator  
] appears and you will hear a beep when the subject comes  
into focus. The shutter can be released even if the subject is  
not in focus.  
• Available only when the mode dial is set to e, K, b, c,  
L, a or p.  
• The focus mode is fixed to k in \ (Moving Object)/  
l (Night Snap)/Z (Pet)/R (Kids)/n (Stage Lighting) of H  
mode.  
A (k)  
Continuous  
mode  
When the shutter release button is pressed halfway to focus, the  
camera tracks the subject if it is determined to be a moving object.  
• You can set the action priority for Continuous Shooting in [13.  
AF.C Setting] of the [A Custom Setting 2] menu.  
Takes pictures giving priority to keeping the  
subject in focus during Continuous Shooting.  
(default setting)  
Focus-  
priority  
4
FPS-  
priority  
Takes pictures giving priority to the shooting speed  
during Continuous Shooting.  
Switches automatically between l and k modes  
according to the subject. Set in [AF.A] of [AF Settings] in the  
[A Rec. Mode 2] menu.  
Operates as specified by the camera’s external focus  
mode switch. (default setting)  
P
Operates as f, overriding the external focus mode  
switch.  
f
Auto mode  
O
• The focus mode is fixed to f in n mode.  
• In H mode, f is not available because the focus mode is  
automatically set depending on the scene mode selected.  
• Even if f is selected, the focus mode is fixed to l during  
Live View shooting in e, K, b, c, L, a or p mode.  
If you do not want to use the AF assist light in l mode, you can turn it off  
by clearing the check box for [AF Assist Light] in [AF Settings] of the [A Rec.  
Mode 2] menu.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
104  
Selecting the Focusing Point (AF Point)  
Sets the focusing point when shooting with the viewfinder.  
Auto (5 AF Out of the 5 AF points, the camera selects the optimum AF  
b
Points)  
point even if the subject is not centered. (default setting)  
Auto (11 AF Out of the 11 AF points, the camera selects the optimum AF  
c
Points)  
Select  
Spot  
point even if the subject is not centered.  
Sets the focusing point to the user selected point from eleven  
points in the AF frame.  
S
O
Sets the focusing point to the center of the viewfinder.  
4
1
Press the M button in standby mode.  
The control panel appears.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select [AF Active  
Area], and press the 4 button.  
The [AF Active Area] screen appears.  
Use the four-way controller (45)  
AF Activve Area  
Auto (5 AFF Points)  
to select a focus point selection  
mode, and press the 4 button.  
The camera returns to the control panel.  
AUTO  
Cancel  
OK OK  
MENU  
• You can also change the setting from [AF Active Area] in [AF Settings] of the  
[A Rec. Mode 2] menu.  
• The focus point selection mode is fixed to O regardless of this setting when  
using lenses other than DA, DA L, D FA, FA J, FA or F lenses.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
105  
Selecting the Desired Focusing Point  
1
Select S in Step 3 on p.104, and press the 4 button.  
2
Press the 3 button or the shutter release button  
halfway.  
The camera returns to the status screen and is ready to take a picture.  
3
Select the desired AF point.  
1/30  
400  
F4.5  
4
128  
Available operations  
Four-way controller (2345)  
4 button  
Changes the AF point.  
Press and hold 4 button  
Disables changing the AF point and  
enables direct key operation of the four-  
way controller.  
To enable changing the AF point, press  
the 4 button again while direct key  
operation is enabled.  
• The position of the changed AF point is stored even if the focus point  
selection mode is switched to b, c or O, or the camera is turned off.  
If [AF Active Area] is assigned to the  
V
/
Y
button in [Button  
Customization] of the [ Rec. Mode 4] menu (p.165), press the  
A
V/Y  
button to enable or disable changing the AF point, and turn the front/rear e-  
dial to change the AF point as in Step 4. You can select the upper or lower AF  
point with the front e-dial (  
Press the button to return the AF point to the center of the AF frame. This  
is useful when operating the camera while looking through the viewfinder.  
R), and the left or right with the rear e-dial (S).  
d
• When [Expanded Area AF] in [AF Settings] of the [A Rec. Mode 2] menu is  
enabled, if your subject briefly moves out from the focus point that was  
selected when the focus mode was set to k (or when [AF.A] was  
enabled), the camera will continue to focus on your subject based on  
information from the focus points (back-up focus points) surrounding the  
selected focus point. The back-up focus points are displayed in pink on the  
status screen.  
• You will hear a beep when switching between enabling or disabling changing  
the AF point. The beep can be turned off. (p.206)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
106  
Setting the Contrast AF during Live View  
You can select from the following autofocus methods when shooting with  
Live View.  
Detects and tracks faces of people. (default setting)  
Face  
Detection  
D
E
The main face detection frame for autofocus and auto  
exposure is displayed in yellow.  
Tracks the subject in focus when the shutter release button is  
pressed halfway.  
Tracking  
Focuses on a desired area.  
The sensor is divided into 100 areas (10 horizontal by 10  
vertical), and you can select a wider or narrower focusing area  
by using 4, 16, or 36 of those 100 available areas. (p.108)  
G
H
Select  
Spot  
4
Focuses on a limited area at the center.  
1
Press the M button in standby mode.  
The control panel appears.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select [Contrast  
AF], and press the 4 button.  
The [Contrast AF] screen appears.  
Use the four-way controller (45)  
Contrast AF  
Face Deteection  
to select the desired mode and  
press the 4 button.  
The camera returns to the control panel.  
Cancel  
OK OK  
MENU  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
107  
• You can also change the setting from [Contrast AF] in [Live View] of the [A  
Rec. Mode 4] menu.  
• [Contrast AF] is fixed to D in U (Standard)/c (Portrait)/. (Night Scene  
Portrait) of n mode or c (Portrait)/. (Night Scene Portrait)/R (Kids) of  
H mode.  
• To lock the focus and recompose the picture, select G or H.  
• To take pictures when the subject is not in focus, set [12. AF.S Setting] to  
[Release-priority] in the [A Custom Setting 2] menu.  
• You can set whether to display a grid, info  
Live View  
overlay, histogram, and bright/dark area  
Contrast AF  
warning during Live View in [Live View] of  
AF Autoozoom  
the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu. When [Info  
Focuss Peaking  
Overlay] is disabled, the indicators which  
Grid Dissplay  
Info Ovverlay  
Histograam Display  
provide shooting information are not  
displayed. (Press the shutter release  
button halfway to display the shutter speed,  
aperture value, sensitivity and number of  
recordable still pictures.)  
Bright/Dark Area  
4
Cancel  
OK OK  
MENU  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
108  
Selecting the Desired Focusing Area  
You can set the range of the autofocusing area (AF area).  
1
Select G in Step 3 on p.106, and press the 4 button.  
The camera returns to the control panel.  
2
Press the 3 button or the shutter release button  
halfway.  
The camera is ready to take a picture.  
3
4
Press the U/i button.  
4
The Live View image is displayed on the monitor.  
Press the 4 button.  
The range of the selectable area is displayed with broken lines and a  
rectangle appears on it. You can set the AF area by changing the position  
and size of this rectangle.  
5
Select the AF area.  
OK OK  
Available operations  
Four-way controller  
Changes the position of the AF area.  
(2345)  
Rear e-dial (S)  
Changes the size of the AF area.  
Returns the AF area to the center.  
d button  
6
Press the 4 button.  
The AF area is set.  
The set AF area is saved in the memory even if the Contrast AF setting is  
changed or the camera is turned off.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
109  
Checking the Focus  
When shooting with Live View, you can check the focus lock position by  
magnifying the image on the monitor, centering around the area in focus.  
1
View the subject on the monitor, and press the shutter  
release button halfway.  
The autofocus system operates.  
2
Press the 4 button while keeping the shutter release  
button pressed halfway.  
4
While the shutter release button is pressed halfway, the image on the  
monitor is magnified centering around the AF point.  
3
4
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to  
change the magnification.  
Magnification can be selected from x2, x4  
or x6.  
x2  
Press the 4 button or stop pressing the shutter release  
button halfway.  
The camera is ready to take a picture.  
• When [AF Autozoom] is enabled in [Live View] of the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu,  
the camera automatically magnifies the image 1 second after the focus is  
locked.  
• In \ mode, the image can be magnified by simply pressing the 4 button.  
(p.111)  
The image cannot be magnified when [Contrast AF] is set to [Tracking].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
110  
Adjusting the Focus Manually  
(Manual Focus)  
While looking through the viewfinder or viewing the Live View screen, turn  
the focusing ring until the subject is clearly visible. In \ mode, the shutter  
can be released by pressing the shutter release button fully even if the  
subject is not in focus.  
Focusing Using the Viewfinder  
You can manually adjust the focus using the matte field in viewfinder.  
4
1
Set the focus mode switch to \.  
2
Look through the viewfinder and  
turn the focusing ring.  
If the focusing ring is turned while  
pressing the shutter release button  
halfway, the focus indicator ] appears  
and you will hear a beep when the subject  
comes into focus.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
111  
Focusing Using Live View  
1
Set the focus mode switch to \.  
2
While viewing the monitor, turn  
the focusing ring.  
4
3
When it is difficult to check the focus, press the 4  
button.  
The image on the monitor is magnified.  
x4  
Available operations  
Rear e-dial (S) to the right (y) Magnifies the image (up to 6 times)  
Rear e-dial (S) to the left (f) Reduces the image (up to 2 times)  
Four-way controller (2345)  
Changes the display area.  
d button  
Changes the display area to the center.  
4
Press the 4 button or the shutter release button  
halfway.  
The camera is ready to take a picture.  
When [Focus Peaking] is enabled in [Live View] of the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu,  
the outline of the subject in focus is emphasized and makes it easier to check  
the focus. If you switch to = mode after enabling Focus Peaking in \ mode,  
Focus Peaking also works in = mode.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
112  
AF Fine Adjustment  
You can precisely fine tune your lenses with the camera’s autofocus  
system.  
• Be sure to use [AF Fine Adjustment] only when necessary. Care should  
be taken as adjusting the autofocus may make it difficult to capture  
images with the appropriate focus.  
• Any camera shake during test shooting may make it difficult to obtain the  
accurate focusing position. Therefore, always use a tripod when taking test  
shots.  
1
Select [19. AF Fine Adjustment] in the [A Custom Setting  
3] menu, and press the four-way controller (5).  
4
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [On], and press  
the four-way controller (5).  
The [19. AF Fine Adjustment] screen appears.  
3
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Apply All] or  
[Apply One].  
Apply All Applies the same adjustment value to all lenses.  
This item will appear only when the lens ID is obtained. Saves  
Apply One and applies a different adjustment value for each lens type.  
(Up to 20 lens types)  
Reset  
Resets the saved adjustment value to the default setting.  
Press the four-way controller  
AF Fine Adjjustment  
19.  
(5), and adjust the value.  
Apply All  
0
Apply One  
Unset  
Reset  
Cancel  
OK OK  
MENU  
0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
113  
Available operations  
Four-way controller (5)/  
Rear e-dial (S) to the right (y)  
Adjusts the focus to a closer position.  
Adjusts the focus to a farther position.  
Four-way controller (4)/  
Rear e-dial (S) to the left (f)  
| button  
Resets the adjustment value to the  
default setting.  
5
6
7
Press the 4 button.  
The adjustment value is saved.  
Press the 3 button three times.  
The camera is ready to take a picture.  
4
Take a test picture.  
You can easily check focus accuracy by magnifying the image during  
Live View (p.109) or Digital Preview (p.115).  
Shooting in Catch-in Focus Mode  
When [18. Catch-in Focus] of the [A Custom Setting 3] menu is set  
to [On] and one of the following types of lenses is attached, Catch-in  
Focus shooting is enabled and the shutter is released automatically  
when the subject comes into focus.  
• Manual focus lens  
• DA or FA lens that has both = and \ settings on the lens (the  
setting must be set to \ before shooting)  
How to Take Pictures  
1 Set the focus mode switch to l.  
Disable f (Autofocus/Auto) by clearing the check box for  
[AF.A].  
2 Set the focus on a position the subject will pass.  
3 Press the shutter release button fully.  
The shutter is released automatically when the subject comes  
into focus at the set position.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
114  
Checking the Depth of Field (Preview)  
You can use the preview function to check depth of field, composition,  
exposure and focus before taking a picture.  
There are two preview methods.  
Preview Method  
Optical Preview  
Description  
For checking the depth of field with the viewfinder.  
|
For checking the composition, exposure and  
focus on the monitor.  
Digital Preview  
e
Optical Preview is always used for Interval Shooting and Multi-exposure.  
4
Displaying the Optical Preview  
1
Assign [Optical Preview] to the V/Y button.  
Refer to “Setting the V/Y Button Operation” (p.165) for details.  
2
3
Look through the viewfinder to focus on the subject.  
Press the V/Y button while  
looking through the viewfinder.  
You can check the depth of field in the  
viewfinder while the V/Y button is  
pressed.  
During this operation, no shooting  
information is displayed in the viewfinder,  
and the shutter cannot be released.  
4
Take your finger off the V/Y button.  
Optical Preview is ended and the camera is ready to take a picture.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
115  
Displaying the Digital Preview  
1
Assign [Digital Preview] to the V/Y button.  
Refer to “Setting the V/Y Button Operation” (p.165) for details.  
2
Focus on the subject, and press the V/Y button.  
| appears on the monitor during preview  
and you can check the composition,  
exposure and focus.  
4
Available operations  
Rear e-dial (S)  
Magnifies the preview image. (p.177)  
Saves the preview image.  
m button  
3
Press the shutter release button halfway.  
Digital Preview is ended and the autofocus system operates.  
The maximum display time for Digital Preview is 60 seconds.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
116  
Using the Shake Reduction Function  
to Prevent Camera Shake  
Taking Pictures Using the Shake Reduction  
Function  
The Shake Reduction function reduces camera shake that occurs when  
the shutter release button is pressed.  
The Shake Reduction function works effectively when taking pictures in  
the following situations.  
• when taking pictures in dimly lit locations, such as indoors, at night,  
on cloudy days and in the shade  
• when taking telephoto pictures  
4
• The Shake Reduction function does not work for blurring caused by subject  
movement. To take pictures of a moving subject, increase the shutter speed.  
• The Shake Reduction function may not fully reduce camera shake when  
taking close-up shots. In this case, it is recommended to deactivate the  
Shake Reduction function and use the camera with a tripod.  
• The Shake Reduction function will not fully work when shooting with a very  
slow shutter speed, for example when panning or capturing images of night  
scenes. In this case, it is recommended to deactivate the Shake Reduction  
function and use the camera with a tripod.  
• The Shake Reduction function is available with any PENTAX lens compatible  
with this camera. However, be sure to set the focal length before using a lens  
for which focal length information cannot be automatically obtained. Refer to  
“Functions Available with Various Lens Combinations” (p.259) for details.  
Reducing Vertical and Horizontal Camera Shake  
1
Press the M button in standby mode.  
The control panel appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select [Shake  
Reduction], and press the 4 button.  
The [Shake Reduction] screen appears.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
117  
3
4
Use the four-way controller (45)  
to select Q or R, and press the  
4 button.  
Shake Reduction  
On  
The camera returns to the control panel.  
Cancel  
OK OK  
MENU  
Uses Shake Reduction. (default setting)  
Does not use Shake Reduction.  
Q
R
Press the shutter release button halfway.  
4
The Shake Reduction function is  
activated, and k appears in the status  
screen, viewfinder, and Live View screen.  
• The Shake Reduction function is not available in the following situations.  
- Self-timer shooting  
- Remote Control shooting  
- when p mode is set  
- when HDR Capture is set, and the Auto Align function is disabled  
- during Composition Adjustment  
• The Shake Reduction function is activated in Z (Night Scene HDR) of H  
mode (except when shooting with the self-timer).  
• The Shake Reduction function will not fully work (for about 2 seconds)  
immediately after the camera is turned on or is restored from Auto Power Off.  
Wait for the Shake Reduction function to become stable before shooting.  
• You can also change the setting from the [A Rec. Mode 3] menu.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
118  
Shooting with the Self-timer  
Self-timer The shutter is released after about 12 seconds. Use this mode  
g
(12 sec.)  
to include the photographer in the picture.  
The shutter is released about 2 seconds after the shutter release  
button is pressed. Use this mode to avoid camera shake when  
the shutter release button is pressed.  
Self-timer  
(2 sec.)  
Z
Shooting with the self-timer is not available in \ (Moving Object)/Z (Pet)/R  
(Kids) of H mode.  
1
Mount the camera onto a tripod.  
4
2
Press the four-way controller (5) in standby mode.  
The Drive Mode setting screen appears.  
3
4
Use the four-way controller (45) to select g.  
Press the four-way controller  
Self-timer (12 sec.)  
(3), use the four-way controller  
(45) to select g or Z, and press  
the 4 button.  
The camera is ready to take a picture.  
Cancel  
OK OK  
MENU  
5
Press the shutter release button halfway.  
The autofocus system operates.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
119  
6
Press the shutter release button  
fully.  
For g, the self-timer lamp starts blinking  
slowly and then blinks rapidly 2 seconds  
before the shutter is released. A beep is  
heard and the rate increases. The shutter  
will be released about 12 seconds after  
the shutter release button is pressed fully.  
For Z, the shutter will be released about 2 seconds after the shutter  
release button is pressed fully.  
• Select [Single Frame Shooting] in the Drive Mode setting screen to cancel  
shooting with the self-timer. The setting is canceled automatically when the  
camera is turned off if you clear the check box for [Drive Mode] in [Memory]  
of the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu. (p.215)  
4
• The Shake Reduction function is not available.  
• You can set the camera so that the beep does not sound. (p.206)  
• The exposure may be affected if light enters the viewfinder (except in a  
mode). Use the AE Lock function (p.96) or attach the optional ME viewfinder  
cap.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
120  
Shooting with a Remote Control Unit  
(Optional)  
The shutter can be released from a distance by using an optional remote  
control unit.  
The shutter is released immediately after the shutter  
release button on the remote control unit is pressed.  
Remote Control  
h
i
Remote Control  
(3 sec. delay)  
The shutter is released about 3 seconds after the shutter  
release button on the remote control unit is pressed.  
Shooting with a remote control unit is not available in the following situations.  
• when \ (Moving Object)/Z (Pet)/R (Kids) of H mode is set  
• when Interval Shooting is set  
4
1
Mount the camera onto a tripod.  
2
Press the four-way controller (5) in standby mode.  
The Drive Mode setting screen appears.  
3
4
Use the four-way controller (45) to select h.  
Press the four-way controller  
Remote Coontrol  
(3), use the four-way controller  
(45) to select h or i, and press  
the 4 button.  
The remote control receiver on the front  
of the camera will blink and the camera is  
in a standby status.  
Cancel  
OK OK  
MENU  
5
Press the shutter release button halfway.  
The autofocus system operates.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
121  
6
Point the remote control unit  
towards the remote control  
receiver on the front of the  
camera, and press the shutter  
release button on the remote  
control unit.  
4 m  
The maximum operating distance of a  
remote control unit is about 4 m from the front of the camera.  
After a picture is taken, the remote control receiver lights for 2 seconds  
and then returns to blinking.  
• By default, you cannot adjust the focus with a remote control unit. Focus on  
the subject first with the camera before operating with a remote control unit.  
When [14. AF with Remote Control] is set to [On] in the [A Custom Setting 2]  
menu, you can use a remote control unit to adjust the focus.  
• Select [Single Frame Shooting] in the Drive Mode setting screen to cancel  
shooting with a remote control unit. The setting is canceled automatically  
when the camera is turned off if you clear the check box for [Drive Mode] in  
[Memory] of the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu. (p.215)  
4
• The Shake Reduction function is not available.  
• When i is selected, the flash mode cannot be set to [Wireless Mode].  
• The exposure may be affected if light enters the viewfinder (except in a  
mode). Use the AE Lock function (p.96) or attach the optional ME viewfinder  
cap.  
• Shooting with a remote control unit may not be available in backlit conditions.  
• When using the Remote Control Waterproof O-RC1, the autofocus system  
can be operated with the S button. The { button cannot be used.  
• The Remote Control F can send a remote control signal about 30,000 times.  
Contact a PENTAX Service Center to replace the battery (this will involve a  
fee).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
122  
Taking Pictures Continuously  
Continuous Shooting  
Pictures can be taken continuously while the shutter release button is fully  
pressed.  
Continuous  
Shooting (Hi)  
Takes pictures continuously at high speed.  
Takes pictures continuously at slow speed.  
g
h
Continuous  
Shooting (Lo)  
4
• Continuous Shooting is not available in the following situations.  
• when Z (Night Scene HDR) of H mode, or p mode is set  
• when Interval Shooting or HDR Capture is set  
• When g or h is set, you cannot save RAW images during Instant Review or  
playback.  
1
Press the four-way controller (5) in standby mode.  
The Drive Mode setting screen appears.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (45) to select g.  
Press the four-way controller  
Continnuous SShhootinng (Hi)  
(3), use the four-way controller  
(45) to select g or h, and press  
the 4 button.  
The camera is ready to take pictures  
continuously.  
Cancel  
OK OK  
MENU  
4
Press the shutter release button halfway.  
The autofocus system operates.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
123  
5
Press the shutter release button fully.  
Pictures are taken continuously while the shutter release button is fully  
pressed. Take your finger off the shutter release button to stop.  
• The capture mode is fixed to g in \ (Moving Object)/Z (Pet)/R (Kids) of  
H mode.  
• If the focus mode is set to l, the focus position is locked in the first frame  
and pictures are taken continuously at the same interval.  
• If the focus mode is set to k, focusing is continuously activated during  
Continuous Shooting.  
• The shutter cannot be released until charging is complete when using the  
built-in flash. Set [15. Release While Charging] to [On] in the [A Custom  
Setting 3] menu to enable shutter release before the built-in flash is ready.  
• Select [Single Frame Shooting] in the Drive Mode setting screen to cancel  
Continuous Shooting. The setting is canceled automatically when the camera  
is turned off if you clear the check box for [Drive Mode] in [Memory] of the [A  
Rec. Mode 4] menu. (p.215)  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
124  
Interval Shooting  
Takes pictures at a set interval from a set time.  
The following items can be set.  
Interval  
Set the time interval between shots from 3 seconds to 24 hours.  
Set from 2 to 999.  
The number of pictures that can be set varies depending on the shooting  
conditions such as the amount of available space on the SD Memory Card.  
Number of  
Shots  
Start  
Interval  
Select whether to take the first picture now or at a set time. Selecting [Now]  
starts shooting immediately. When [Set Time] is selected, set [Start Time].  
Start Time Set the time at which to start shooting.  
4
Interval Shooting is not available in the following situations.  
• when p mode or C mode is set  
• when Multi-exposure is set  
1
Select [Interval Shooting] in the [A Rec. Mode 2] menu,  
and press the four-way controller (5).  
The [Interval Shooting] screen appears.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Interval], and  
press the four-way controller (5).  
Use the four-way controller (45)  
Interval SShooting  
to select hours, minutes, or  
Start shhooting  
seconds, and use the four-way  
controller (23) to set the time.  
Interval  
00:00'03"  
002 images  
Now  
Number off Shots  
Start Intterval  
Start Time  
Press the 4 button to complete the  
setting.  
Cancel  
OK OK  
MENU  
4
5
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Number of  
Shots], and press the four-way controller (5).  
Press the four-way controller (45), and use the four-way  
controller (23) to select the number of shots to be taken.  
Press the 4 button to complete the setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
125  
6
7
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Start Interval],  
and press the four-way controller (5).  
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Now] or [Set  
Time], and press the 4 button.  
If you selected [Now], proceed to Step 10.  
8
9
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Start Time],  
and press the four-way controller (5).  
Use the four-way controller (45) to select hours or  
minutes, and use the four-way controller (23) to set the  
time.  
4
Press the 4 button to complete the setting.  
10 Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Start  
shooting], and press the 4 button.  
The camera is ready to take a series of interval pictures.  
11 Press the shutter release button halfway.  
The autofocus system operates.  
12 Press the shutter release button fully.  
When [Start Interval] is set to [Now], the first picture is taken. When set  
to [Set Time], shooting starts at the set time.  
For shooting multiple pictures, pictures are taken at the interval set in  
Step 3.  
To cancel shooting, press the 3 button.  
After the set number of pictures are taken, [Interval Shooting complete]  
is displayed, and the camera returns to normal standby mode.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
126  
• Refer to “Interval Movie” (p.133) for information on how to perform Interval  
Shooting in C mode.  
• If the mode dial or the main switch is turned while shooting, the pictures that  
have been already taken are saved and Interval Shooting is ended.  
• [Single Frame Shooting] is used regardless of the current drive mode setting.  
• If the subject is not in focus with the focus mode set to l or the previous  
image processing cannot be completed before taking the next picture, no  
picture may be taken.  
• Although each shot taken is displayed with Instant Review, they cannot be  
magnified, deleted, or saved in RAW format.  
• The monitor turns off during the intervals between shots.  
• If the Auto Power Off function turns the camera off before starting Interval  
Shooting, the camera automatically turns on again when the shooting time  
approaches.  
4
When using Interval Shooting, use the optional AC adapter kit or install a fully  
charged battery. If the battery becomes depleted during Interval Shooting,  
recording may stop.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
127  
Multi-exposure  
You can create a picture by taking multiple exposures and merging them  
into a single image.  
Multi-exposure is not available in the following situations.  
• when Z (Night Scene HDR) of H mode, or C mode is set  
• when Interval Shooting, Digital Filter or HDR Capture is set  
1
Select [Multi-exposure] in the [A Rec. Mode 2] menu, and  
press the four-way controller (5).  
The [Multi-exposure] screen appears.  
4
2
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Number of  
Shots], and press the four-way controller (5).  
Use the four-way controller (23)  
Multi-exxposure  
to select the number of shots,  
Start shhooting  
and press the 4 button.  
Number off Shots  
2 times  
Auto EV Adjjustment  
Select from 2 to 9 shots.  
Cancel  
OK OK  
MENU  
4
5
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Auto EV  
Adjustment], and use the four-way controller (45) to  
select P or O.  
When set to O, the exposure is adjusted according to the number of  
shots.  
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Start  
shooting], and press the 4 button.  
The camera is ready to take a series of pictures.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
128  
6
7
Take the picture.  
The composite picture is displayed in Instant Review each time the  
shutter release button is pressed.  
The following operations can be performed during Instant Review.  
Available operations  
U/i button  
Discards pictures taken up to that point and takes  
pictures again from the first frame.  
3 button  
Saves pictures taken up to that point and cancels  
shooting.  
When the above operations are performed or after the set number of  
shots are taken, the screen in Step 3 appears again.  
4
Press the 3 button twice.  
Multi-exposure is ended.  
Exposure Bracketing and Lens Correction are not available.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
129  
Recording Movies  
This camera enables you to record movies with the following format.  
• Sound  
Monaural  
• File format  
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 (File extension: .MOV)  
Changing the Settings for Movie Recording  
Settings for recording movies can be changed using the [C Movie] menu  
or the control panel.  
Below, how to change the settings from the [C Movie 1] menu is  
explained as an example.  
4
1
Set the mode dial to C, and press the 3 button.  
The [C Movie 1] menu appears.  
1
Turn the front e-dial (R) if you pressed  
Exposure Setting  
Movie Capture Settings  
the 3 button in any other capture  
mode.  
Recording Soound LLevel  
Movie SR  
Intervaal Movie  
Exit  
MENU  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Exposure  
Setting], and press the four-way controller (5).  
Use the four-way controller (23) to select e, c or a,  
and press the 4 button.  
Sets the exposure automatically. Allows you to adjust the EV  
compensation value. (default setting)  
e
Allows you to set the aperture and EV compensation values.  
c
a
Allows you to set the shutter speed, aperture value, and sensitivity.  
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Movie Capture  
Settings], and press the four-way controller (5).  
The [Movie Capture Settings] screen appears.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
130  
5
6
Select [Recorded Pixels].  
Display  
Recorded Pixels  
Aspect Ratio  
Frame Rate (fps)  
Resolution  
a (default setting) 1920×1080  
30/25/24  
K
K
I
b
c
1280×720  
640×480  
60/50/30/25/24  
30/25/24  
When the setting is changed, the amount of recordable time for that  
setting appears at the top right of the screen.  
Select [Framerate].  
The frame rates that can be selected vary depending on the recorded pixels.  
4
7
Set [Quality Level] to [C], [D], or [E].  
8
Press the 3 button.  
The [C Movie 1] menu appears.  
9
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Recording  
Sound Level], and use the four-way controller (45) to  
select the recording sound level.  
Set in the range from 0 to 5.  
Sound is not recorded when l (0) is selected.  
10 Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Movie SR],  
and press the four-way controller (5).  
11 Use the four-way controller (23) to select Q or R, and  
press the 4 button.  
Q
R
Uses Movie Shake Reduction. (default setting)  
Does not use Movie Shake Reduction.  
12 Press the 3 button.  
The camera is ready to record a movie.  
The settings described in this section can also be set through the control panel.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
131  
Recording Movies  
1
Set the mode dial to C.  
Live View for movie recording is displayed.  
Recording Sound Level Movie SR  
2
View the subject on the monitor.  
Change the exposure setting as  
necessary.  
4
10'30"  
Recordable Time  
Available operations  
Rear e-dial (S)  
Exposure Setting  
c/a: Adjusts the aperture value  
(only before shooting).  
Front e-dial (R)  
Exposure Setting a: Adjusts the shutter speed.  
m button  
Exposure Setting e/c: Adjusts the EV  
Rear e-dial (S)  
compensation value (±2 EV).  
Four-way controller (2) Exposure Setting  
a: Adjusts the sensitivity setting.  
3
4
5
Press the shutter release button halfway.  
The autofocus system operates.  
When the focus mode switch is set to \, turn the focusing ring until the  
subject is clearly visible on the focusing screen.  
Press the shutter release button fully.  
Movie recording starts.  
A red P displayed at the top right of the screen blinks during movie  
recording.  
Press the shutter release button again.  
Movie recording stops.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
132  
• When [Recording Sound Level] is set to a value other than l (0), the camera  
operation sounds are also recorded. When recording a movie, mount the  
camera onto a tripod and do not operate the camera while recording.  
• The flash is not available.  
• When recording a movie using an image processing function such as Digital  
Filter, some frames may be omitted from the recorded movie.  
• If the internal temperature of the camera becomes high during movie  
recording, the camera may be turned off automatically to protect the camera  
circuitry.  
• When recording a movie, regardless of the focus mode setting, recording  
starts when the shutter release button is pressed fully even if the subject is  
not in focus.  
• You can record a movie continuously up to 4 GB or 25 minutes. When the SD  
Memory Card is full, recording stops and the movie is saved.  
• The screen display in C mode is set according to the [Live View] setting  
made in the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu. (p.107)  
4
• You can set the functions for when the front/rear e-dial is turned or the d  
button is pressed in [E-Dial Programming] of the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu.  
(p.162)  
• If you intend to shoot continuously for a long period, use of the optional AC  
adapter kit is recommended.  
• You can also use an optional remote control unit to record a movie. (p.120)  
Press the four-way controller (5) in C mode to display the screen for setting  
whether to use the remote control instead of the normal Drive Mode setting  
screen.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
133  
Interval Movie  
Takes still pictures at a set interval from a set time and saves them as a  
single movie file (Motion JPEG, file extension: .AVI).  
The following items can be set.  
Select from 3 sec., 5 sec., 10 sec., 30 sec., 1 min., 5 min., 10  
min., 30 min., or 1 hour.  
Interval  
Set the duration of recording from 12 seconds to 99 hours. The  
Recording Time  
time that can be set varies depending on the [Interval] setting.  
Select whether to take the first picture now or at a set time.  
Start Interval  
Start Time  
Selecting [Now] starts shooting immediately. When [Set Time]  
is selected, set [Start Time].  
4
Set the time at which to start shooting.  
Interval Movie is available only when the mode dial is set to C.  
1
Select [Interval Movie] in the [C Movie 1] menu, and press  
the four-way controller (5).  
The [Interval Movie] screen appears.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Interval], and  
press the four-way controller (5).  
Use the four-way controller (23)  
Intervaal Movie  
to select the shooting interval,  
Start shhooting  
and press the 4 button.  
Interval  
3sec.  
Recordingg Time  
Start Intterval  
Start Time  
00:00'12"  
Now  
Cancel  
OK OK  
MENU  
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Recording  
Time], and press the four-way controller (5).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
134  
5
Use the four-way controller (45) to select hours,  
minutes, or seconds, and use the four-way controller  
(23) to set the time.  
Press the 4 button to complete the setting.  
6
7
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Start Interval],  
and press the four-way controller (5).  
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Now] or [Set  
Time], and press the 4 button.  
If you selected [Now], proceed to Step 10.  
4
8
9
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Start Time],  
and press the four-way controller (5).  
Use the four-way controller (45) to select hours or  
minutes, and use the four-way controller (23) to set the  
time.  
Press the 4 button to complete the setting.  
10 Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Start  
shooting], and press the 4 button.  
The camera is ready to record a movie.  
11 Press the shutter release button halfway.  
The autofocus system operates.  
12 Press the shutter release button fully.  
When [Start Interval] is set to [Now], a picture is taken immediately,  
Instant Review is displayed, and then the monitor turns off.  
After the set number of pictures are taken, [Interval Shooting complete]  
is displayed, and the camera returns to normal standby mode.  
When recording with Interval Movie, use the optional AC adapter kit or install a  
fully charged battery. If the battery becomes depleted during Interval Movie  
recording, recording may stop.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
135  
Playing Back Movies  
Recorded movies can be played back in playback mode in the same  
manner as saved still pictures.  
1
Select the movie to play back in the single image display  
of playback mode.  
The first frame of the movie is displayed on the monitor.  
2
Press the four-way controller  
(2).  
4
Movie playback starts.  
10'00"  
Available operations  
Four-way controller (2) Pauses/resumes playback.  
Four-way controller (5) Forwards a frame (when paused).  
Press and hold four-way Fast-forwards playback.  
controller (5)  
Four-way controller (4) Reverses a frame (when paused).  
Press and hold four-way Fast-reverses playback.  
controller (4)  
Four-way controller (3) Stops playback.  
Displays the playback mode palette (when  
stopped). (p.174)  
Rear e-dial (S)  
Adjusts the volume (6 levels).  
M button  
Switches between [Standard Information Display]  
and [No Information Display].  
m button  
Saves the image on the monitor as a JPEG file  
(when paused). (p.136).  
When the movie ends, playback stops and the first frame is displayed again.  
• Use an optional AV cable to play back recorded movies on a TV screen or  
other AV devices. (p.200)  
• QuickTime is required to play back movies transferred to a computer. (p.232)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
136  
Capturing a Still Picture from a Movie  
You can capture a single frame from a movie and save it as a JPEG still  
picture.  
1
Press the four-way controller (2) in Step 2 on p.135 to  
pause the movie.  
Frame number/  
Total number of frames  
2
Use the four-way controller (45)  
still picture.  
90/18000  
4
10'00"  
3
4
Press the m button.  
The save confirmation screen appears.  
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Save as], and  
press the 4 button.  
The captured image from the movie is saved in JPEG format.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
137  
Editing Movies  
Movies can be divided and unwanted segments can be deleted.  
1
Select the movie to play back in the single image display  
of playback mode.  
The first frame of the movie is displayed on the monitor.  
2
3
Press the four-way controller (3).  
The playback mode palette appears.  
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select [ (Movie  
Edit), and press the 4 button.  
4
The movie editing screen appears.  
4
Select a point where you want to  
divide the movie.  
The first frame at the dividing point is  
displayed at the top of the screen.  
00'00"  
10'00"  
Up to four points can be selected to divide  
the original movie into five segments.  
Stop  
OK OK  
MENU  
INFO  
Available operations  
Four-way controller (2)  
Plays back/pauses a movie.  
Four-way controller (5)  
Forwards a frame (when paused).  
Fast-forwards playback.  
Press and hold four-way  
controller (5)  
Four-way controller (4)  
Reverses a frame (when paused).  
Fast-reverses playback.  
Press and hold four-way  
controller (4)  
Rear e-dial (S)  
Adjusts the volume (6 levels).  
M button  
Confirms/cancels a dividing point.  
Proceed to Step 8 if you do not want to delete any segment.  
5
Press the U/i button.  
The screen to select the segment(s) to delete is displayed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
138  
6
Use the four-way controller (45)  
to move the selection frame, and  
press the 4 button.  
00'05"  
10'00"  
The segment(s) to delete are specified.  
Multiple segments can be deleted at  
once.  
Select segments for deletion  
OK  
MENU  
Press the 4 button again to cancel the  
selection.  
7
Press the 3 button.  
The screen that was displayed in Step 4 appears again.  
4
8
9
Press the 4 button.  
The save confirmation screen appears.  
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select [Save as], and press the  
4 button.  
Saves divided movie  
as separate files  
The movie is divided at the specified  
points and the unwanted segments are  
deleted from it. The divided movie is then  
saved as separate files and the single  
image display reappears.  
Save as  
Cancel  
OK OK  
MENU  
• Select dividing points in chronological order from the beginning of the movie.  
When canceling the selected dividing points, cancel each of them in reverse  
order (from the end of the movie to the beginning). In an order other than  
specified, you can neither select frames as a dividing point nor cancel the  
selections of the dividing points. You cannot, for example, select the frames  
prior to the last selected frame as a dividing point while selecting a dividing  
point.  
• Movies with a short recording time cannot be divided.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 Shooting Settings  
This chapter describes image file formats and camera  
operating settings in capture mode.  
Setting a File Format ..........................................140  
Setting the White Balance .................................143  
Correcting Images ..............................................148  
Setting the Image Finishing Tone .....................155  
Customizing the Button/E-dial Functions ........162  
Saving Frequently Used Settings .....................168  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
140  
Setting a File Format  
Set the file format, number of recorded pixels, quality level, and color  
space of still pictures.  
1
Select [Image Capture Settings] in the [A Rec. Mode 1]  
menu, and press the four-way controller (5).  
The [Image Capture Settings] screen appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select [File Format], [JPEG  
Recorded Pixels], [JPEG Quality]  
Image Capture Settings  
File Foormat  
JPEG Recordded Piixels  
JPEG Quuality  
or [Color Space], and press the  
Color Space  
four-way controller (5).  
5
Refer to p.141 to p.142 for details about  
each of these settings.  
MENU  
3
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to change the settings,  
and press the 4 button.  
Press the 3 button twice.  
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu item appears  
again.  
• File Format, JPEG Recorded Pixels and JPEG Quality can also be set  
through the control panel.  
• When File Format, JPEG Recorded Pixels or JPEG Quality is changed, the  
number of still pictures that can be recorded for that setting appears on the  
monitor.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
141  
File Format  
You can set the format of image files.  
Captures images in JPEG format. (default setting)  
JPEG You can change the [JPEG Recorded Pixels] and [JPEG Quality]  
settings.  
Captures images in CMOS sensor output format without processing.  
RAW files are recorded with the general-purpose DNG (Digital  
Negative) format designed by Adobe Systems.  
Effects of White Balance, Custom Image and Color Space are not  
applied to the captured images, but they are saved as actual original  
RAW  
information. When you perform the development process by using the  
[RAW Development] function (p.196), you can create JPEG images  
with these effects.  
Captures images in both JPEG and RAW formats.  
When [One Push File Format] is assigned to the V/Y button, you  
can press the button to temporarily change the file format and save an  
RAW+  
5
image in both file formats. (p.166)  
• When Digital Filter or HDR Capture is set, the file format is fixed to [JPEG]  
and cannot be changed. To change the file format, deactivate these  
functions.  
• In Z (Night Scene HDR) of H mode, images are saved in JPEG format,  
regardless of the [File Format] setting.  
JPEG Recorded Pixels  
Sets the recording size of images when the file format is set to [JPEG].  
Recorded Pixels  
Pixels  
4928×3264 (default setting)  
4224×2816  
p
E
a
f
3456×2304  
2688×1792  
• The more pixels there are, the bigger the file size. The file size will also vary  
according to the [JPEG Quality] setting.  
• The quality of a captured image depends on the shooting settings, resolution  
of the printer and a variety of other factors.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
142  
JPEG Quality  
You can set the image quality level (compression ratio). The default setting  
is C (Best).  
C Best  
Quality: clearer File size: larger  
Quality: grainier File size: smaller  
D
E
Better  
Good  
Color Space  
You can select a color space to use.  
Mainly used for devices such as a computer. (default setting)  
sRGB  
5
Covers a wider range of color than sRGB and is used for  
commercial uses such as industrial printing.  
AdobeRGB  
The file naming system changes depending on the color space setting as  
shown below. (“xxxx” is a four-digit sequential number.)  
For sRGB: IMGPxxxx.JPG  
For AdobeRGB: _IMGxxxx.JPG  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
143  
Setting the White Balance  
Adjusts the color of an image based on ambient light conditions so that  
white objects appear white.  
Color  
Item  
Setting  
Temperature *1  
(default setting) 8,000K  
Auto  
F
Daylight  
For use when taking pictures in sunlight. Approx. 5,200K  
G
For use when taking pictures in the  
shade. It reduces the bluish color tones in Approx. 8,000K  
a picture.  
Shade  
Cloudy  
H
For use when taking pictures on cloudy  
Approx. 6,000K  
days.  
^
For use when taking pictures under  
fluorescent lighting. Select the type of  
fluorescent light.  
5
Fluorescent  
Light  
D
N
W
L
Fluorescent - Daylight Color Approx. 6,500K  
Fluorescent - Daylight White Approx. 5,000K  
Fluorescent - Cool White  
Fluorescent - Warm White  
J
Approx. 4,200K  
Approx. 3,000K  
For use when taking pictures under light  
bulbs or other tungsten light. It reduces  
the reddish color tones in a picture.  
Tungsten  
Approx. 2,850K  
I
For use when taking pictures using the  
built-in flash.  
Flash  
Approx. 5,400K  
L
Use this to keep and strengthen the color  
tone of the light source in the image.  
*2  
f
Use this to manually adjust the white  
balance according to the lighting when  
taking pictures. Up to three settings can  
be saved.  
Manual 1-3  
Color  
K
Use this to set the color temperature  
Temperature value.  
K
*1 The color temperatures (K) shown above are all estimates. These do not indicate precise  
colors.  
*2 CTE = Color Temperature Enhancement  
The white balance is fixed to F in n and H modes.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
144  
1
Press the four-way controller (3) in standby mode.  
The White Balance setting screen appears.  
The last image taken is displayed in the background.  
2
Use the four-way controller (45)  
to select the white balance.  
Auto Whitee Balance  
When J is selected, press the four-way  
controller (3) and use the four-way  
controller (45) to select D, N, W, or L.  
Proceed to Step 6 if you do not need to  
change the parameters.  
Check  
Cancel  
OK OK  
MENU  
INFO  
WB  
Available operations  
V/Y button Uses Digital Preview to preview the background image with  
the white balance effect applied (only when shooting with  
the viewfinder).  
5
m button  
Saves the background image (only when the data is  
available).  
M button  
Displays the fine-tuning screen.  
3
4
Press the M button.  
The fine-tuning screen appears.  
Fine-tune the white balance.  
G3  
A2  
Check  
Cancel  
OK OK  
MENU  
0
Available operations  
Four-way controller Adjusts the tone of the colors between green (G) and  
(23) magenta (M).  
Four-way controller Adjusts the tone of the colors between blue (B) and  
(45)  
amber (A).  
d button  
Resets the adjustment value to the default setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
145  
5
6
Press the 4 button.  
The screen that was displayed in Step 2 appears again.  
Press the 4 button.  
The camera is ready to take a picture.  
To set the white balance for when the flash discharges, select [Auto White  
Balance], [Unchanged] or [Flash] in [9. WB When Using Flash] of the [A  
Custom Setting 2] menu.  
Adjusting the White Balance Manually  
You can adjust the white balance depending on the light source when  
taking pictures.  
5
1
Select K in Step 2 on p.144, and press the four-way  
controller (3).  
2
Use the four-way controller (45  
)
Manual Whitee Balance  
to select 1 to 3.  
K
K
SHUTTER  
Adjust  
Check  
Cancel  
OK OK  
MENU  
INFO  
WB  
3
4
Under the light you wish to measure the white balance of,  
select a white area as the subject.  
Or, fully display a white sheet of paper in the center of the viewfinder or  
monitor.  
Press the shutter release button fully.  
Set the focus mode to \ when the shutter cannot be released.  
The screen to select the measuring range is displayed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
146  
5
6
Use the four-way controller (2345) to move the frame  
to the position you want to measure.  
Press the 4 button.  
The white balance is measured, and the screen that was displayed in  
Step 2 appears again.  
Adjust the white balance as necessary.  
The message [The operation could not be completed correctly] appears  
when measuring is unsuccessful. Press the 4 button to remeasure the  
white balance.  
7
Press the 4 button.  
The camera is ready to take a picture.  
If a picture is extremely overexposed or underexposed, the white balance may  
not be adjusted. In this case, adjust exposure to the correct exposure before  
adjusting the white balance.  
5
Saving the White Balance Settings of a Captured Image  
You can copy the white balance settings of a captured image and save it  
as Manual White Balance.  
Only the white balance settings of still pictures taken with this camera can be  
copied. However, the following images cannot be selected.  
• Multi-exposure image  
• Index image  
• Still pictures captured from a movie  
1
Press the four-way controller (3) in the single image  
display of playback mode.  
The playback mode palette appears.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select K (Save  
as Manual WB), and press the 4 button.  
The save confirmation screen appears.  
Turn the front e-dial (R) to select an image.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
147  
4
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select a number, and press the  
4 button.  
100-0001  
Saves this image's White  
Balance settings as a custom  
selection  
The white balance settings of the selected  
image are saved as Manual White  
Balance and the camera is ready to take a  
Save as Maanual 1  
Save as Manual 2  
Save as Maanual 3  
Cancel  
OK OK  
MENU  
picture. The white balance setting is  
K.  
Adjusting the White Balance with Color  
Temperature  
Use to set the color temperature value.  
5
1
Select K in Step 2 on p.144, and press the M button.  
2
Adjust the color temperature with  
the front or rear e-dial.  
You can set the color temperature value  
within the range from 2500K to 10000K.  
10000K  
G3  
A2  
Check  
Cancel  
OK OK  
MENU  
0
Color temperature steps vary depending on the e-dial.  
E-dial  
Kelvin  
1 Step (100K)  
Mired *1  
Front (R)  
Rear (S)  
1 Step (20M)  
5 Steps (100M)  
10 Steps (1,000K)  
*1 The default setting for Color Temperature step units is [Kelvin]. You can change the  
step units to [Mired] in [11. Color Temperature Steps] of the [A Custom Setting 2]  
menu. However, figures are converted to and displayed in Kelvin.  
3
4
Press the 4 button.  
The White Balance setting screen reappears.  
Press the 4 button.  
The camera is ready to take a picture.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
148  
Correcting Images  
The camera and lens properties can be automatically modified for when  
taking pictures.  
Brightness Adjustment  
Expands the dynamic range and enables a wider range of tones  
expression by the CMOS sensor and reduces the occurrence of  
overexposed and underexposed areas.  
1
Press the M button in standby mode.  
The control panel appears.  
5
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select [Highlight  
Correction] or [Shadow Correction], and press the  
4
button.  
The [Highlight Correction] or [Shadow Correction] screen appears.  
3
Use the four-way controller (45)  
to change the settings.  
Highligght Coorrection  
Auto  
For Highlight Correction, select from  
[Auto] (default setting), [On] or [Off].  
Cancel  
OK OK  
MENU  
For Shadow Correction, select from  
[Auto] (default setting), [Low], [Medium],  
[High] or [Off].  
Shadow Corrrection  
Auto  
Cancel  
OK OK  
MENU  
4
Press the 4 button.  
The camera returns to the control panel.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
149  
When the sensitivity is set to less than ISO 200 setting, [Highlight Correction]  
cannot be set to [On].  
You can also set [Highlight Correction] and [Shadow Correction] in [D-Range  
Settings] of the [A Rec. Mode 2] menu.  
High Dynamic Range Image Capture  
High dynamic range photography is a way of expressing the entire range  
from dark to bright areas by capturing multiple images with different  
exposures (underexposed, properly exposed (standard), and  
overexposed), and combining them into a single image.  
Available by setting through the control panel or in the  
[A Rec. Mode 1] menu.  
HDR Capture  
Z (Night Scene HDR) Available by selecting from H mode. (p.84)  
5
This section explains how to set [HDR Capture].  
• HDR Capture is not available in the following situations.  
• when the file format is set to [RAW] or [RAW+]  
• when p mode is set  
• During HDR Capture or in Z (Night Scene HDR) mode, the following  
functions are not available.  
- Continuous Shooting  
- Flash discharge  
- Digital Filter  
- Exposure Bracketing  
- Multi-exposure  
• If Z (Night Scene HDR) is selected, settings for this mode override the  
settings for HDR Capture.  
During HDR Capture or in  
Z
(Night Scene HDR) mode, multiple images are  
combined together to create a single image, so it will take time to save an image.  
1
Select [HDR Capture] in the [A Rec. Mode 1] menu, and  
press the four-way controller (5).  
The [HDR Capture] screen appears.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
150  
2
3
Press the four-way controller  
(5), use the four-way controller  
(23) to select a setting, and  
press the 4 button.  
HDR Capture  
HDR Capture  
Auto Align  
Exposure Bracket Value  
Cancel  
OK OK  
MENU  
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Auto Align],  
and use the four-way controller (45) to select O or P.  
Uses Auto Align. Activates Shake Reduction according to the [Shake  
Reduction] setting. (default setting)  
O
P
Does not use Auto Align. Deactivates Shake Reduction.  
5
4
5
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Exposure  
Bracket Value], and press the four-way controller (5).  
Use the four-way controller (23) to set the range in which  
to change the exposure, and press the 4 button.  
Select from ±1 EV, ±2 EV (default setting) or ±3 EV.  
6
Press the 3 button twice.  
The camera is ready to take a series of pictures.  
• The procedure of Step 2 can also be performed through the control panel.  
• When both Shake Reduction and Auto Align are activated, take note of the  
following points.  
Make sure to hold the camera firmly so that the composition of the picture does  
not change while the three images are captured. If there is a great difference  
of the composition between three images, Auto Align may not be possible.  
• Images captured with HDR Capture are susceptible to camera shake and  
blur. Be sure to set a higher shutter speed and a higher ISO sensitivity.  
• When the sensitivity is set to [ISO AUTO], the sensitivity can be raised  
more easily than normal.  
• Auto Align may not be possible when lenses that have a focal length  
exceeding 100 mm are used, or when the entire subject is checkered or  
has a uniform surface.  
• In Z (Night Scene HDR) mode, [HDR Capture] is fixed to [Auto] and the  
Auto Align function is enabled.  
If [One Push File Format] is assigned to the  
V
/Y  
button, pressing the button  
temporarily deactivates HDR Capture and saves captured images in RAW+.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
151  
Lens Correction  
Reduces distortions and lateral chromatic aberrations occurring due to  
lens properties.  
Distortion  
Distortion is a phenomenon in which the center of the image appears  
inflated (barrel distortion) or the center of the image appears pinched  
(pincushion distortion). Distortion occurs more easily when using a  
zoom lens or a small diameter lens, and straight walls or the horizon in  
an image appear curved.  
5
Pincushion distortion  
Barrel distortion  
Lateral chromatic aberration  
Lateral chromatic aberration is a phenomenon in which the  
magnification of an image varies according to the colors (wavelengths  
of light) when a picture was taken, and may cause a blurred image.  
Chromatic aberration occurs more easily at shorter focal lengths.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
152  
• Corrections can only be made when using DA, DA L, D FA or some FA  
lenses. The Lens Correction functions cannot be selected when an  
incompatible lens is attached. (p.259)  
• The Lens Correction functions are disabled when using an accessory such  
as a close-up ring or rear converter that is attached between the camera and  
the lens.  
• The shooting speed for Continuous Shooting may be slower when using the  
Distortion Correction function.  
• The effects of the Lens Correction functions may be barely noticeable in  
some cases due to the shooting conditions or other factors.  
1
Press the M button in standby mode.  
The control panel appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select [Distortion  
Correction] or [Lat-Chromatic-Ab Adj], and press the 4  
button.  
5
The [Distortion Correction] or [Lat-Chromatic-Ab Adj] screen appears.  
3
4
to select [Off] or [On].  
Distortion Coorrecction  
On  
Cancel  
OK OK  
MENU  
Press the 4 button.  
The camera returns to the control panel.  
• When a compatible lens is attached and the file format is set to [RAW] or  
[RAW+], the correction information is saved as a RAW file parameter and you  
can select [On] or [Off] when developing the RAW images. (p.197)  
• You can also set [Distortion Correction] and [Lat-Chromatic-Ab Adj] in [Lens  
Correction] of the [A Rec. Mode 2] menu.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
153  
Composition Adjustment  
It allows you to adjust the composition of your image using the Shake  
Reduction mechanism. Use this when you want to adjust the composition,  
such as when using a tripod.  
1
Select [Composition Adjust.] in the [A Rec. Mode 3]  
menu, and press the four-way controller (5).  
The [Composition Adjust.] screen appears.  
2
Select [Start adjustment], and  
press the 4 button.  
Compositionn Adjust.  
Start adjustment  
Recall Previous Position  
To start adjusting the composition from  
the previous position, set [Recall  
5
Please note: depending on the  
Previous Position] to O.  
lens, adjuusting tthhe compoosition  
may cause vignetting  
Live View is displayed and the  
composition can be adjusted.  
OK OK  
MENU  
3
Adjust the composition.  
0
0
0
The amount of adjustment (the number of  
steps) is displayed at the top right of the  
screen.  
Adjust thhe comppositiion of  
the image  
Cancel  
OK OK  
MENU  
Available operations  
Four-way controller  
Moves the composition up, down, left or right.  
(2345)  
Adjust up to 16 steps (approximately ±1.0 mm) on  
the image sensor.  
Rear e-dial (S)  
Adjusts the level of the composition.  
Up to 8 steps (approximately ±1°) can be adjusted.  
| button  
Resets the adjustment value to the default setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
154  
4
Press the 4 button.  
The camera returns to normal Live View and is ready to take a picture.  
• [Shake Reduction] is not available.  
• The adjustment value is reset when Live View is ended.  
• If you use the Composition Adjustment function frequently, you can assign  
the function to the |/Y button. (p.165)  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
155  
Setting the Image Finishing Tone  
Take pictures with settings to suit for your creative photographic vision.  
Custom Image  
Select the desired picture style from the following modes and enjoy taking  
pictures with a creative finishing tone.  
Image Tone  
Bright  
Image  
Saturation, hue and contrast are set relatively high to create a  
bright sharp image. (default setting)  
Natural  
Portrait  
Creates a natural look that is close to the actual color.  
Reproduces a healthy and bright skin tone.  
5
Increases color saturation, highlights shapes, and produces a  
vivid color image.  
Landscape  
Vibrant  
Radiant  
Muted  
Changes the color slightly to create an antique look.  
Emphasizes glossiness to produce a spectacular finish.  
Reduces the saturation to create a soft look.  
Reduces the saturation and increases the contrast to create  
the look of an old picture.  
Bleach Bypass  
Creates a picture with strong image contrast as if taken with  
reversal film.  
Reversal Film  
Monochrome  
Takes pictures using a monochrome color filter.  
Cross  
Processing  
Intentionally changes the hue and contrast. The outcome  
varies each time a picture is taken.  
The image tone is automatically set according to the capture mode and the  
setting cannot be changed in n and H modes.  
1
Press the M button in standby mode.  
The control panel appears.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                           
156  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select [Custom  
Image], and press the 4 button.  
The Custom Image setting screen appears.  
The last image taken is displayed in the background.  
Use the four-way controller  
Bright  
(2345) to select an image  
finishing tone.  
You can check the selected Custom  
Image effect with the background image.  
Proceed to Step 8 if you do not need to  
change the parameters.  
Parameter Adj.  
INFO  
MENU  
Cancel  
Check  
OK OK  
Available operations  
m button  
Saves the background image (only when the data is  
available).  
5
M button  
Displays the screen to adjust the parameters.  
V/Y button Uses Digital Preview to preview the background image  
with the Custom Image effect applied (only when shooting  
with the viewfinder).  
4
5
Press the M button.  
The screen to adjust the parameters appears.  
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to choose the parameter you  
want to change.  
Saturation  
Cancel  
Check  
OK OK  
MENU  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
157  
The following parameters can be changed according to the selected  
image finishing tone.  
Image Tone  
Parameter  
Saturation: -4 to +4  
Hue: -4 to +4  
Bright/  
Natural/  
Portrait/  
Landscape/  
Vibrant/  
Radiant  
High/Low Key Adj: -4 to +4  
Contrast: -4 to +4  
Sharpness: -4 to +4  
Saturation: -4 to +4  
Toning: Off/Green/Yellow/Orange/Red/Magenta/Purple/Blue/Cyan  
High/Low Key Adj: -4 to +4  
Contrast: -4 to +4  
Muted/  
Bleach  
Bypass  
Sharpness: -4 to +4  
Reversal Film Sharpness: -4 to +4  
Filter Effect: None/Green/Yellow/Orange/Red/Magenta/  
Blue/Cyan/Infrared Filter  
5
Toning: Off/Green/Yellow/Orange/Red/Magenta/Purple/Blue/Cyan  
High/Low Key Adj: -4 to +4  
Monochrome  
Contrast: -4 to +4  
Sharpness: -4 to +4  
Cross  
Processing  
*1  
Random/Preset 1-3/Favorite 1-3  
*1 For [Favorite 1-3], you can save the settings of a cross processed image as a  
favorite in advance through the playback mode palette. (p.158)  
6
Use the four-way controller (45) to adjust the  
parameter’s value.  
You can check the saturation and hue with the radar chart.  
Available operations  
Rear e-dial (S)  
Switches between [Sharpness] and [Fine Sharpness].  
Resets the adjustment value to the default setting.  
d button  
7
Press the 4 button.  
The screen that was displayed in Step 3 appears again.  
8
Press the 4 button.  
The camera returns to the control panel.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
158  
You can also change the settings from the [A Rec. Mode 1] menu.  
Saving the Cross Processing Settings of a Captured  
Image  
The outcome of cross processing varies each time a picture is taken. If a  
cross processed image that you like comes out, you can save the Cross  
Processing settings used in that image. A total of three Cross Processing  
settings can be saved.  
1
Press the four-way controller (3) in the single image  
display of playback mode.  
The playback mode palette appears.  
5
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select s (Save  
Cross Processing), and press the 4 button.  
The camera will search for cross processed images starting from the  
most recent image taken. (An hourglass icon is displayed while  
searching.) When a cross processed image is found, the screen to save  
the settings appears.  
If there are no cross processed images, the message [No cross  
processed image] appears.  
3
4
Turn the front e-dial (R) to  
select a cross processed image.  
100-0001  
Saves this image's Cross  
Processing settings  
Save as Favorite 1  
Save as Favorite 2  
Save as Favorite 3  
Cancel  
OK OK  
MENU  
Use the four-way controller (23) to select a number, and  
press the 4 button.  
The settings of the selected image are saved to [Favorite 1 - 3] and the  
selected image appears in the single image display.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
159  
Digital Filter  
You can apply a filter effect when taking pictures.  
The following filters can be selected.  
Filter Name  
Effect  
Parameter  
Extracted Color 1: Red/Magenta/Blue/  
Cyan/Green/Yellow  
For extracting one or  
two specific colors  
Extract Color and making the rest of  
the image black and  
white.  
Extractable Range of Color 1: 1 to 5  
Extracted Color 2: Off/Red/Magenta/  
Blue/Cyan/Green/Yellow  
Extractable Range of Color 2: 1 to 5  
Shading Level: Off/Low/Medium/High  
For taking pictures  
Toy Camera that look as if taken  
with a toy camera.  
(Not available in  
C
mode.)  
Blur: Low/Medium/High  
5
Tone Break: Red/Green/Blue/Yellow  
Toning (B-A): 7 levels  
For taking pictures  
Retro  
with the look of old  
photos.  
Frame Composite: None/Thin/Medium/  
Thick (Not available in C mode.)  
For taking pictures  
with high contrasts.  
High Contrast  
Shading *1  
Intensity: 1 to 5  
For taking pictures  
with the edge areas  
darkened.  
Shading Type: 4 types  
Shading Level: -3 to +3  
Inverts the colors in  
the image.  
Invert Color  
Off/On  
Color: Red/Magenta/Blue/Cyan/Green/  
Yellow  
For taking pictures  
with the selected color  
filter.  
Color  
Color Density: Light/Medium/Dark  
*1 Cannot be selected in C mode.  
• Digital Filter is not available in the following situations.  
• when Z (Night Scene HDR) of H mode is set  
• when the file format is set to [RAW] or [RAW+]  
• When Digital Filter is set, the following functions are not available.  
• Continuous Shooting  
• HDR Capture  
• Multi-exposure  
• Depending on the filter used, it may take longer to save images.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
160  
1
Press the M button in standby mode.  
The control panel appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select [Digital  
Filter], and press the 4 button.  
The Digital Filter setting screen appears.  
The last image taken is displayed in the background.  
3
Use the four-way controller  
(2345) to select a filter.  
Toy Camera  
You can check the selected filter effect  
with the background image.  
Proceed to Step 7 if you do not need to  
change the parameters.  
Parameter Adj.  
INFO  
MENU  
Cancel  
Check  
OK OK  
5
Available operations  
M button  
Displays the screen to adjust the parameters.  
m button  
Saves the background image (only when the data is  
available).  
V/Y button Uses Digital Preview to preview the background image  
with the filter effect applied (only when shooting with the  
viewfinder).  
4
5
Press the M button.  
The screen to adjust the parameters appears.  
Use the four-way controller (23)  
Shadingg Level  
to select a parameter, and use  
the four-way controller (45) to  
adjust the value.  
Press the d button to reset the  
adjustment value to the default setting.  
Cancel  
Check  
OK OK  
MENU  
6
Press the 4 button.  
The screen that was displayed in Step 3 appears again.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
161  
7
Press the 4 button.  
The camera returns to the control panel.  
• You can also change the settings from the [A Rec. Mode 1] menu.  
• Select [No Filter] in Step 3 to finish shooting with a digital filter.  
• After shooting, you can also apply digital filter effects to JPEG/RAW images  
in playback mode. (p.189)  
• [Shading Level] for the Toy Camera filter and the Shading filter cannot be  
checked with Live View.  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
162  
Customizing the Button/E-dial  
Functions  
Functions can be assigned to the front/rear e-dial, V/Y button, and  
=/L button.  
The current functions assigned to the  
buttons/dials can be checked with guide  
display.  
Program  
Automatic Exposure  
Setting the E-dials Operation  
5
For each exposure mode, you can select the parameters for when the front  
and rear e-dials are turned and | button is pressed.  
1
Select [E-Dial Programming] in the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu,  
and press the four-way controller (5).  
The [E-Dial Programming 1] screen appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select an exposure  
E-Dial Programming  
1 2  
mode.  
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to display the  
[E-Dial Programming 2] screen.  
MENU  
3
Press the four-way controller (5).  
The screen for the selected exposure mode appears.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
163  
4
Press the four-way controller  
(5), and use the four-way  
controller (23) to select the  
desired setting.  
Exposure Mode  
The following settings can be selected for  
each exposure mode.  
Cancel  
OK OK  
MENU  
Exposure  
Mode  
Front E-dial  
(R)  
Rear E-dial  
(S)  
| Button  
b
c
c
b
}e  
(default setting)  
}e  
m
eSHIFT  
m
eLINE  
e
eSHIFT  
eLINE  
5
o
(default setting)  
(default setting)  
(default setting)  
o
eSHIFT  
o
m
o
eSHIFT  
o
m
eLINE  
K
eLINE  
o
b
b
b
m
b
c
m
b
b
o
b
o AUTO  
o
o AUTO  
c
c
m
c
c
m
o
c
c
o AUTO  
o AUTO  
o
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
164  
Exposure  
Mode  
Front E-dial  
(R)  
Rear E-dial  
(S)  
| Button  
b
c
c
b
(default setting)  
(default setting)  
eLINE  
L
/a  
bSHIFT  
cSHIFT  
c
(default setting)  
c
o
c
p
c
o
Depends on the [Exposure Setting] (p.129) of the  
[C Movie 1] menu.  
C
b: Change shutter speed c: Change aperture value o: Change sensitivity  
m: Adjust EV compensation value }e: Return to e eLINE: Program line  
eSHIFT: Program shift –: Not available  
5
5
6
Press the 4 button.  
Press the 3 button.  
The screen that was displayed in Step 2 appears again.  
Repeat Steps 2 to 6 to change the settings of other exposure modes.  
7
Press the 3 button twice.  
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu item appears again.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
165  
Setting the V/Y Button Operation  
You can assign one of the following functions to the V/Y button.  
Temporarily changes the file format. Simultaneously saves  
an image in both JPEG and RAW formats, regardless of the  
One Push File  
[File Format] setting. You can set whether or not to apply the  
Format  
setting to only one image, and select the file format when the  
V
/
Y
button is pressed. (p.166) (default setting)  
Takes multiple pictures with different exposure settings.  
(p.93)  
Exposure Bracketing  
Optical Preview  
While the  
V/Y  
button is pressed, you can check the depth  
of field by stopping down the aperture to the set value. (p.114)  
Displays the Digital Preview. (p.115)  
Digital Preview  
Sets whether to save or magnify the preview image, and  
whether to display the histogram and bright/dark area warning.  
Composition Adjust. Adjusts the composition. (p.153)  
Enables or disables changing the AF point when the focus  
point selection mode is set to [Select]. (p.105)  
5
AF Active Area  
1
Select [Button Customization] in the [A Rec. Mode 4]  
menu, and press the four-way controller (5).  
The [Button Customization] screen appears.  
2
Select  
way controller (5).  
, and press the four-  
Button CCustoomization  
One Push Filee Format  
The screen to select a function of the  
V/Y button appears.  
Enable AF1  
Enable AF1  
MENU  
3
Press the four-way controller  
(5), use the four-way controller  
(23) to select a function, and  
press the 4 button.  
Button CCustoomization  
One Push Fille Format  
Exposure Bracketing  
Optical Prreview  
Digital Prreview  
Compoositiioon Adjust.  
AF Active Area  
Cancel  
OK OK  
MENU  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
166  
4
Press the 3 button three times.  
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu item appears again.  
Setting the One Push File Format  
When [One Push File Format] is assigned to the V/Y button, specify  
the function settings.  
1
Select [One Push File Format] in Step 3 on p.165.  
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Cancel after 1  
shot], and use the four-way controller (45) to select O or  
P.  
5
The recording format returns to the original file format after a picture  
is taken. (default setting)  
O
The setting is canceled when any of the following operations are  
performed.  
• the V/Y button is pressed again  
• the Q button or 3 button is pressed  
• the mode dial is turned  
P
3
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to choose a file format.  
The left side is the [File Format] (p.141) setting and the right side is the  
file format when the V/Y button is pressed.  
Press the four-way controller  
Button CCustoomization  
(5), use the four-way controller  
One Push Fille Format  
(23) to select a file format, and  
Cancel after 1 shot  
press the 4 button.  
MENU  
5
Press the 3 button three times.  
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu item appears  
again.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
167  
Setting the =/L Button Operation  
You can assign one of the following functions to the =/L button.  
Separate settings can be made for still picture shooting and movie  
recording.  
Both the =/L button and shutter release button are  
Enable AF1  
available to perform autofocus. (p.101) (default setting)  
Autofocus is performed only when the  
and not when the shutter release button is pressed halfway.  
=
/
L
button is pressed  
Enable AF2  
Cancel AF  
AE Lock  
While the =/L button is pressed, autofocus is not performed  
even when the shutter release button is pressed. Take your finger  
off the =/L button to return to normal autofocus operation.  
The exposure setting is locked when the =/L button is  
pressed. (p.96)  
5
1
Select [Button Customization] in the [A Rec. Mode 4]  
menu, and press the four-way controller (5).  
The [Button Customization] screen appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select  
the four-way controller (5).  
, and press  
The =/L button icon with C is the setting for movie recording.  
The screen to select a function of the =/L button appears.  
3
4
Press the four-way controller  
(5), use the four-way controller  
(23) to select a function, and  
press the 4 button.  
Button CCustoomization  
Enable AF1  
Enable AF2  
Cancel AF  
AE Lock  
AF is peerforrmmed wheen the  
AF/AE-L bbuttonn is prreessed  
Cancel  
OK OK  
MENU  
Press the 3 button three times.  
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu item appears again.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
168  
Saving Frequently Used Settings  
You can save the current camera settings in A mode and easily retrieve  
them.  
The following settings can be saved.  
• Capture mode (e/K/b/c/L/a/p)  
• Sensitivity  
• Color Space  
• AE Metering  
• White Balance  
• AF.A  
• Flash Mode/Flash Exposure  
Compensation  
• AF point  
• Lens Correction  
• D-Range Settings  
• High-ISO NR  
• Drive Mode  
• Exposure Bracketing  
• Exposure Compensation Value  
• Digital Filter  
• Slow Shutter Speed NR  
• Shake Reduction  
• E-Dial Programming  
• Button Customization  
5
• Custom Image  
• HDR Capture  
• File Format  
• [A Custom Setting 1-3]  
menu settings  
• JPEG Recorded Pixels  
• JPEG Quality  
The A mode cannot be set when the mode dial is set to n, H or C.  
Saving the Settings  
You can save the settings as USER1 or USER2 mode and use them by  
setting the mode dial to B or C.  
1
Select a capture mode, and make the necessary settings.  
2
Select [Save USER Mode] in the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu,  
and press the four-way controller (5).  
The [Save USER Mode] screen appears.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
169  
3
4
5
Press the four-way controller  
(5).  
Save USER Mode  
Save USER Mode  
Rename USER Mode  
Check Saved Settings  
Reset USER Mode  
MENU  
Use the four-way controller  
(23) to select [USER1] or  
[USER2], and press the four-way  
controller (5).  
Save USER Mode  
USER1  
USER2  
MENU  
5
Press the four-way controller (2)  
to select [Save], and press the  
4 button.  
Save USER Mode  
Saves currrent ssettinngs in  
USER1 custtom mode  
The settings are saved and the screen  
that was displayed in Step 3 appears  
again.  
Save  
Cancel  
OK OK  
MENU  
Editing a Setting Name  
You can change the name of the A mode in which you saved settings.  
1
Select [Rename USER Mode] in Step 3 of “Saving the  
Settings”, and press the four-way controller (5).  
The [Rename USER Mode] screen appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [USER1] or  
[USER2], and press the four-way controller (5).  
The text-entry screen appears.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
170  
3
Enter the text.  
Rename USER Mode  
Textselection  
cursor  
Up to 18 single-byte  
alphanumeric  
characters and  
symbols can be  
entered.  
Finish  
Text input cursor  
Delete One Chharacter  
Cancel  
OK Enter  
MENU  
Available operations  
Four-way controller  
(2345)  
Moves the text selection cursor.  
Moves the text input cursor.  
Rear e-dial (S)  
m button  
Switches between upper and lower case letters.  
4 button  
Enters a character selected with the text selection  
cursor at the position of the text input cursor.  
5
U/i button  
Deletes a character at the position of the text input  
cursor.  
4
After entering the text, move the text selection cursor to  
[Finish], and press the 4 button.  
The name is changed and the camera returns to the [Rename USER  
Mode] screen.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
171  
Checking the Saved USER Settings  
1
Select [Check Saved Settings] in Step 3 of p.169, and  
press the four-way controller (5).  
The [Check Saved Settings] screen appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [USER1] or  
[USER2], and press the four-way controller (5).  
The current settings saved as A mode  
are displayed.  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2.0  
Use the four-way controller (23) to  
switch between pages.  
200-800  
G1 A1  
1
EV  
0.0  
0.0  
5
OK OK  
MENU  
3
Press the 4 button.  
The camera returns to the [Save USER Mode] screen.  
Using Saved USER Settings  
You can easily retrieve saved settings.  
1
Set the mode dial to B or C.  
The A mode guide appears for 30  
seconds and the saved settings are  
retrieved.  
Use the four-way controller (23) to  
check the saved settings.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
172  
2
3
Change the settings as necessary.  
The capture mode can be changed in  
[Exposure Mode] of the [A Rec. Mode 1]  
menu.  
1 2 3 4  
Exposurre Mode  
Custom Image  
Digitall Filter  
This screen appears only when the mode  
dial is set to B or C.  
HDR Capture  
Image Capturre Settings  
AE Meteering  
Cancel  
OK OK  
MENU  
Take a picture.  
The settings changed in Step 2 are not saved as A mode settings. When  
the camera is turned off, the camera returns to the originally saved settings. To  
change the original settings, save the A mode settings again.  
5
Resetting to Default Settings  
Resets the settings saved as A mode to the default settings.  
1
Select [Reset USER Mode] in Step 3 on p.169, and press  
the four-way controller (5).  
The [Reset USER Mode] screen appears.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [USER1] or  
[USER2], and press the four-way controller (5).  
Press the four-way controller (2)  
Reset USER Mode  
to select [Reset], and press the  
4 button.  
Resets USER1 ccustoomm mode  
to defauult settttings annd name  
The A mode settings return to the  
default values and the screen that was  
displayed before selecting the menu item  
appears again.  
Reset  
Cancel  
OK OK  
MENU  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
6
Playback Functions and  
Image Editing  
This chapter describes how to use the various playback  
functions and how to edit the captured images.  
How to Operate the Playback/Edit  
Functions ............................................................174  
Setting the Playback Display Method ..............176  
Selecting the Playback Functions ....................177  
Deleting Multiple Images ...................................184  
Processing Images ............................................187  
Developing RAW Images ...................................196  
Connecting the Camera to an AV Device .........200  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
174  
How to Operate the Playback/Edit  
Functions  
Make settings related to playing back and editing images in the playback  
mode palette or [Q Playback] menu.  
For details on how to use the menus, refer to “Using the Menus” (p.39).  
Playback Mode Palette Items  
Press the four-way controller (3) in the  
Image Rotation  
single image display to call up the playback  
mode palette.  
You can also display the playback mode  
palette when a movie is paused.  
Rotates ccapturred immaages.  
Useful forr imagee playbback on  
TV and otther dissplay deevices  
Exit  
MENU  
OK OK  
6
Item  
Function  
Page  
Image Rotation *1  
Changes the rotation information of an image. p.183  
s
Modifies an image with various filter effects  
which, for example, change the color tone of  
p.189  
Digital Filter *1  
Resize*1 *2  
D
an image and produce a soft or slim  
appearance.  
Changes the number of recorded pixels or  
size of an image, and saves it as a new  
image.  
p.187  
n
Crops out only the desired area of the  
picture and saves it as a new image.  
Cropping *1  
Index *1  
p.188  
p.194  
p.220  
o
Joins a number of images together and  
creates a new image with them.  
p
Z
Protects images from being accidentally  
erased.  
Protect  
Sets the number of prints and whether to  
print the date on the images saved on the  
SD Memory Card.  
DPOF *1 *2  
Slideshow  
p.229  
p.182  
r
Plays back the images one after another.  
u
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
175  
Item  
Function  
Page  
p.146  
Saves the white balance settings of a  
captured image as Manual White Balance.  
*1  
K
Save as Manual WB  
Saves the settings for an image captured in  
Cross Processing mode of Custom Image to p.158  
Favorite.  
Save Cross  
Processing  
s
Converts a RAW image to JPEG format and  
p.196  
RAWDevelopment*1  
Movie Edit *3  
h
[
saves it as a new image.  
p.137  
segments.  
Eye-Fi Image  
Transfer *4  
Transfers selected images wirelessly using  
p.227  
N
an optional Eye-Fi card.  
*1 This cannot be performed when a movie is displayed.  
*2 This cannot be performed when a RAW image is displayed.  
*3 This can be performed only when a movie is displayed.  
*4 This can be performed only when [Eye-Fi Communication] is set to [SELECT] in [Eye-Fi]  
of the [R Set-up 2] menu.  
Playback Menu Items  
6
The following items are available in the [Q Playback] menu.  
Press the 3 button in playback mode to display the [Q Playback 1]  
menu.  
Menu  
Item  
Slideshow  
Page  
p.181  
Plays back images one after another. You  
can set how images will be displayed in  
the slideshow.  
Sets the initial magnification when  
magnifying images.  
Quick Zoom  
Q1  
p.176  
p.186  
Sets whether to display the bright/dark  
area warning during playback.  
Bright/Dark Area  
Delete All Images  
Deletes all saved images at once.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
176  
Setting the Playback Display Method  
You can set the initial magnification when magnifying images, and whether  
to display the Bright/Dark Area warning in playback mode.  
1
Select [Quick Zoom] in the [Q Playback 1] menu, and  
press the four-way controller (5).  
2
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select the magnification, and  
press the 4 button.  
1
Slideshow  
Quickk Zoom  
Bright/Daark Area  
Delete Alll Images  
Select from [×16], [×8], [×4], [×2] or [Off]  
(default setting).  
Off  
Cancel  
OK OK  
MENU  
3
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Bright/Dark  
Area], and use the four-way controller (45) to select O or  
P.  
6
When set to O, bright portions blink red and dark portions blink yellow.  
Press the 3 button.  
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu item appears  
again.  
The bright/dark area warning is not displayed in Detailed Information Display  
and RGB Histogram Display. (p.30)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
177  
Selecting the Playback Functions  
You can display images in a list or play back saved images successively.  
Magnifying Images  
Images can be magnified up to 16 times in playback mode.  
1
Select an image in the single image display.  
2
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to the  
right (toward y).  
100-0001  
The image is magnified with each click (1.2  
to 16 times).  
6
x4  
Available operations  
Rear e-dial (S) to the right (y) Magnifies the image (up to 16 times).  
Rear e-dial (S) to the left (f) Reduces the image (up to 1 times).  
Four-way controller (2345)  
Changes the display area.  
Front e-dial (R)  
Retains the magnification and the  
position of the display area and shows  
the previous/next image.  
d button  
Returns the position of the display area  
to the center (when the display area is  
not at the center).  
M button  
Switches between [Standard Information  
Display] and [No Information Display].  
4 button  
Returns to the single image display.  
• The default setting for the first click is 1.2 times. You can change this in  
[Quick Zoom] of the [Q Playback 1] menu. (p.176)  
• The initial full display of vertical images is displayed with a magnification of  
0.75 times that of horizontal images. Therefore, magnification at the first click  
starts at 1 times.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
178  
Displaying Multiple Images  
1
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to the left (toward f) in the  
single image display.  
The 9 thumbnail display screen appears  
(default setting).  
-
100 0010  
2
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to the left (toward f) again to  
switch to the folder display.  
Images are grouped and displayed by the  
folder in which they are saved.  
50  
6
100  
103  
101  
104  
102  
105  
_
100 0202  
3
4
Select the image(s) to display.  
Available operations  
Four-way controller  
Moves the selection frame.  
(2345)  
U/i button  
Deletes the selected images. (p.184)  
4 button  
Displays the selected image in the single  
image display.  
Displays the first image from the selected folder  
in the single image display (in Folder Display).  
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to the right (toward y).  
The camera returns to the single image display.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
179  
Changing the Multiple Image Display Style  
You can change the number of images displayed at the same time, or  
display the images by shooting date.  
1
Press the M button in Step 1 on p.178.  
The display style selection screen appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller  
(2345) to select the display  
9 Thumbnaiil Dissplay  
style.  
Cancel  
OK OK  
MENU  
4/9/16/36/81 Thumbnail Display  
Icons such as C and ? are displayed with  
images (except in 81 Thumbnail Display).  
6
-
100 0010  
Calendar Filmstrip Display  
Number of images shot on this date  
Images are grouped and displayed by the  
shooting date.  
2/5  
2013.5  
THU  
9
SAT 11  
MON 20  
24  
2013.6  
FRI  
SUN  
2
THU 13  
TUE 25  
107-0002  
Shooting  
date  
Thumbnail  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
180  
Available operations  
Four-way controller (23) Selects a shooting date.  
Four-way controller (45) Selects an image taken on the selected  
shooting date.  
Rear e-dial (S) to the  
right (y)  
Displays the selected image in the single  
image display.  
Turn to the left (f) to return to the Calendar  
Filmstrip Display.  
3
Press the 4 button.  
The selected display style is confirmed.  
The next time the rear e-dial (S) is turned to the left (toward f) in the  
single image display, the screen selected here will be displayed.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
181  
Playing Back Images Continuously  
You can play back all images saved on your SD Memory Card  
successively in a slideshow.  
Setting the Slideshow Display  
Sets how images will be displayed during Slideshow.  
1
Select [Slideshow] in the [Q Playback 1] menu, and press  
the four-way controller (5).  
The Slideshow setting screen appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select an item you want to  
Slideshoow starts  
ġ
Start  
change.  
Display Duration  
Screen Effect  
3sec.  
6
The following items can be changed.  
Repeat Playback  
OK OK  
MENU  
Item  
Display  
Duration  
Description  
Setting  
3sec. (default setting)/  
5sec./10sec./30sec.  
Select an image display duration.  
Screen  
Effect  
Select a transition effect when the  
next image is displayed.  
OFF (default setting)/  
Fade/Wipe/Stripe  
Set whether to start the slideshow  
again from the beginning after the  
last image is displayed.  
Repeat  
Playback  
P (default setting)/O  
3
Press the four-way controller (5), use the four-way  
controller (23) to change the setting, and press the 4  
button.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
182  
Starting the Slideshow  
1
Select [Start] in Step 2 on p.181, and press the 4 button.  
Or, select u (Slideshow) in the playback mode palette,  
and press the 4 button.  
The start screen is displayed and the  
slideshow starts.  
Start  
Available operations  
4 button  
Pauses/resumes playback.  
Displays the previous image.  
Displays the next image.  
Four-way controller (4)  
Four-way controller (5)  
6
2
Press the four-way controller (3).  
Slideshow stops and the single image display reappears.  
After slideshow ends, the camera returns to the single image display  
even if you do not press the four-way controller (3).  
For movies, only the first frame is displayed and then the next image is  
displayed after the set display duration has elapsed. To play a movie during a  
slideshow, press the 4 button while the first frame is displayed. After the  
playback of the movie is finished, the slideshow will resume.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
183  
Rotating Images  
You can change the rotation information that is embedded in the Exif of an  
image so the image can be displayed with the correct image orientation on  
a TV or computer monitor.  
• You cannot change the rotation information of an image in the following  
conditions.  
• when the image is protected  
• when the image rotation information tag is not saved with the image  
• Movie files cannot be rotated.  
1
Select the image you want to rotate in the single image  
display, and press the four-way controller (3).  
The playback mode palette appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select s (Image  
Rotation), and press the 4 button.  
6
The selected image is rotated in 90° increments and the four thumbnail  
images are displayed.  
3
Use the four-way controller  
(2345) to select the desired  
rotation direction, and press the  
4 button.  
The image rotation information is saved.  
Cancel  
OK OK  
MENU  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
184  
Deleting Multiple Images  
You can delete multiple images at once. Be aware that deleted images  
cannot be restored.  
1Protecting Images from Deletion (Protect) (p.220)  
Deleting Selected Images  
You can delete multiple images at once.  
• Protected images cannot be selected.  
• You can select up to 100 images at a time.  
1
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to the left (toward f) in the  
single image display.  
The 9 thumbnail display screen appears (default setting).  
6
2
3
Press the U/i button.  
The screen to select images to delete is displayed.  
Select images to delete.  
Delete  
OK  
MENU  
Available operations  
Four-way controller Moves the selection frame.  
(2345)  
4 button  
Confirms/cancels the image selection.  
Rear e-dial (S) Displays the selected image in the single image display  
when turned to the right; returns to thumbnail display  
when turned to the left.  
Turn the front e-dial (R) to display the previous or  
next image.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
185  
4
5
Press the U/i button.  
The delete confirmation screen appears.  
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Select &  
Delete], and press the 4 button.  
The selected images are deleted.  
Deleting a Folder  
1
Turn the rear e-dial (S) two clicks to the left (toward f)  
in the single image display.  
The folder display screen appears.  
2
3
Press the U/i button.  
6
The delete confirmation screen appears.  
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Delete], and  
press the 4 button.  
The selected folder and all images in it are deleted.  
The confirmation screen appears when there are protected images. Use  
the four-way controller (23) to select [Delete all] or [Leave all] and  
press the 4 button. [Delete all] deletes all the images including the  
protected images, while [Leave all] deletes only non-protected images.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
186  
Deleting All Images  
You can delete all images saved on the SD Memory Card at once.  
1
Select [Delete All Images] in the [Q Playback 1] menu,  
and press the four-way controller (5).  
The confirmation screen for deleting all images is displayed.  
2
Press the four-way controller (2) to select [Delete All  
Images], and press the 4 button.  
All images are deleted.  
The confirmation screen appears when there are protected images. Use  
the four-way controller (23) to select [Delete all] or [Leave all] and  
press the 4 button.  
[Delete all] deletes all the images including the protected images, while  
[Leave all] deletes only non-protected images.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
187  
Processing Images  
Changing the Number of Recorded Pixels  
(Resize)  
Changes the number of recorded pixels of a selected image, and saves it  
as a new image.  
• Only JPEG images captured with this camera can be resized.  
• Images already resized to Z or S with this camera cannot be resized.  
1
Select the image to resize in the single image display, and  
press the four-way controller (3).  
The playback mode palette appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select n  
(Resize), and press the 4 button.  
6
The screen to select the recorded pixels appears.  
3
Use the four-way controller (45)  
to select the number of recorded  
pixels, and press the 4 button.  
You can select one of the image sizes  
starting from one size smaller than that of  
the original image.  
Cancel  
OK OK  
MENU  
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Save as], and  
press the 4 button.  
The resized image is saved as a new image.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
188  
Cutting Out Part of the Image (Cropping)  
Crops out only the desired area of a selected image and saves it as a new image.  
• Only JPEG images captured with this camera can be cropped.  
• Images already resized to Z or S with this camera cannot be cropped.  
1
Select the image to crop in the single image display, and  
press the four-way controller (3).  
The playback mode palette appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select o  
(Cropping), and press the 4 button.  
The cropping frame to specify the size and position of the area to crop  
appears on the screen.  
3
Specify the size and position of  
the area to crop by using the  
cropping frame.  
6
Cancel  
OK OK  
MENU  
INFO  
Available operations  
Four-way controller (2345)  
Rear e-dial (S)  
Moves the cropping frame.  
Changes the size of the cropping frame.  
M button  
Changes the aspect ratio.  
Four-way controller (2345) Rotates the image from -45° to +45°.  
m button  
Rotates the cropping frame in 90° increments  
(only when the cropping frame can be rotated).  
4
5
Press the 4 button.  
The save confirmation screen appears.  
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Save as], and  
press the 4 button.  
The cropped image is saved as a new image.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
189  
Processing Images with Digital Filters  
You can edit captured images using digital filters.  
The following filters are available.  
Filter Name  
Effect  
Parameter  
Filter Effect: OFF/Red/Green/Blue/  
Infrared Filter  
Creates a monochrome  
image.  
Monochrome  
Toning (B-A): 7 levels  
Extracted Color 1: Red/Magenta/  
Blue/Cyan/Green/Yellow  
Extracts one or two  
specific colors and makes  
the rest of the image black  
and white.  
Extractable Range of Color 1: 1 to 5  
Extract Color  
Extracted Color 2: OFF/Red/  
Magenta/Blue/Cyan/Green/Yellow  
Extractable Range of Color 2: 1 to 5  
Shading Level: OFF/Low/Medium/  
High  
Creates an image that  
Toy Camera looks as though it was  
shot with a toy camera.  
Blur: Low/Medium/High  
6
Tone Break: Red/Green/Blue/Yellow  
Toning (B-A): 7 levels  
Creates an image with the  
look of an old photo.  
Retro  
Frame Composite: None/Thin/  
Medium/Thick  
Enhances the contrast in  
High Contrast  
Intensity: 1 to 5  
the image.  
Shading Type: 4 types  
Shading Level: -3 to +3  
OFF/ON  
Creates an image with  
Shading  
darkened edges.  
Invert Color  
Color  
Inverts image colors.  
Color: Red/Magenta/Blue/Cyan/  
Green/Yellow  
Adds a color filter to the  
image.  
Color Density: Light/Medium/Dark  
Tone  
Expansion  
Creates an image with a  
unique contrast.  
Low/Medium/High  
Creates an image that  
looks as though it was  
drawn with a pencil.  
Contrast: Low/Medium/High  
Scratch Effect: OFF/ON  
Sketch  
Creates an image that  
looks as though it was  
painted.  
Intensity: Low/Medium/High  
Saturation: OFF/Low/Medium/High  
Water Color  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                           
190  
Filter Name  
Pastel  
Effect  
Parameter  
Low/Medium/High  
Creates an image that  
looks as though it was  
drawn with a crayon.  
Lessens the tone of the  
image to create an image  
that looks as though it was  
hand-drawn.  
Posterization  
Miniature  
Intensity: 1 to 5  
In-Focus Plane: -3 to +3  
In-Focus Width: Narrow/Middle/  
Wide  
Blurs part of the image to  
create a simulated  
miniature scene.  
In-Focus Plane Angle: Horizon/  
Vertical/Positive Slope/Negative  
Slope  
Blur: Low/Medium/High  
Creates an image with a  
soft focus throughout the  
image.  
Soft Focus: Low/Medium/High  
Soft  
Shadow Blur: OFF/ON  
Creates an image with a  
special sparkling look by  
adding extra glitter to the  
highlights of night scenes  
Effect Density: Small/Medium/Large  
Size: Small/Medium/Large  
Angle: 0°/30°/45°/60°  
6
Starburst  
Creates an image that  
looks as though it was  
shot with a fish-eye lens.  
Fish-eye  
Slim  
Low/Medium/High  
-8 to +8  
Changes the horizontal  
and vertical ratio of  
images.  
Brightness: -8 to +8  
Saturation: -3 to +3  
Hue: -3 to +3  
Base  
Parameter  
Adj  
Adjusts the parameters to  
create the desired image.  
Contrast: -3 to +3  
Sharpness: -3 to +3  
Only JPEG and RAW images captured with this camera can be edited with  
digital filters.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
191  
1
Select an image for applying the digital filter in the single  
image display, and press the four-way controller (3).  
The playback mode palette appears.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select D (Digital  
Filter), and press the 4 button.  
The screen to select a filter appears.  
Use the four-way controller  
100-0001  
(2345) to select a filter.  
Monochhrome  
You can check the selected filter effect  
with the background image.  
You can select a different image by  
turning the front e-dial (R).  
INFO Parameter Adj.  
Stop  
OK OK  
MENU  
Proceed to Step 7 if you do not need to  
change the parameters.  
6
4
5
Press the M button.  
The screen to adjust the parameters appears.  
Use the four-way controller (23)  
100-0001  
Red  
to select a parameter and the  
four-way controller (45) to  
adjust the value.  
Cancel  
OK OK  
MENU  
6
7
Press the 4 button.  
The screen that was displayed in Step 3 appears again.  
Press the 4 button.  
The save confirmation screen appears.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
192  
8
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select [Apply additional  
filter(s)] or [Save as], and press  
the 4 button.  
Continuue seleeccting fillters?  
Apply additionnal filltter(s)  
Save as  
Select [Apply additional filter(s)] when  
you want to apply additional filters to the  
same image. The screen that was  
displayed in Step 3 appears again.  
Cancel  
OK OK  
MENU  
If [Save as] is selected, the filter-processed image is saved as a new image.  
Up to 20 filters, including a digital filter used during shooting (p.159), can be  
applied to the same image.  
Recreating Filter Effects  
Retrieves the filter effects of a selected image and applies the same filter  
effects to other images.  
6
1
Select a filter-processed image in the single image  
display.  
2
3
Select D (Digital Filter) in the playback mode palette, and  
press the 4 button.  
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select [Recreating filter  
effects], and press the 4  
Applyinng the diigitall ffilter  
button.  
Recreating filter effects  
The filter effects used for the selected  
image appear.  
Searching foor the orriginall image  
OK OK  
MENU  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
193  
4
To check the parameter details,  
press the M button.  
100-0001  
Reappliees followiing digittaal filter  
effects frrom preeviouss image  
You can check the filter parameters.  
1.  
5.  
6.  
7.  
8.  
9.  
10.  
11.  
12.  
13.  
14.  
15.  
16.  
17.  
Press the 3 button to return to the  
previous screen.  
2.  
18.  
3.  
19.  
4.  
20.  
Details  
INFO  
OK OK  
MENU  
5
6
Press the 4 button.  
The image selection screen appears.  
Turn the front e-dial (R) to  
select the image to apply the  
same filter effects, and press the  
4 button.  
100-0001  
Performs digittal fiilter  
proceessing too thiss iimage  
You can only select the image that has  
not been processed with a filter.  
6
OK OK  
MENU  
The save confirmation screen appears.  
7
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Save as], and  
press the 4 button.  
The filter-processed image is saved as a new image.  
If [Searching for the original image] is selected in Step 3, the original image  
prior to digital filter application can be retrieved. If the original image is no  
longer stored on the SD Memory Card, the message [Original image, prior to  
digital filter application, is not found] appears.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
194  
Joining Multiple Images (Index)  
Join a number of images together and display them as an index image.  
You can have the camera select the images to include in the index image  
or you can select them yourself. The images will be randomly arranged or  
displayed by file number depending on the layout selected.  
1
Press the four-way controller (  
The playback mode palette appears.  
3) in the single image display.  
2
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select p (Index),  
and press the 4 button.  
The Index setting screen appears.  
3
Press the four-way controller  
(5), use the four-way controller  
(23) to select a layout, and  
Layout  
Images  
Backgrnd.  
6
press the 4 button.  
Selection  
You can select o (Thumbnail),  
p (Square), q (Random1),  
Create an inddex image  
Cancel  
MENU  
OK OK  
r (Random2), s (Random3) or  
p (Bubble).  
Images are displayed according to the file number (from the smallest  
number) for o, and are displayed in random order for other layouts.  
4
5
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Images], and  
press the four-way controller (5).  
Use the four-way controller (23) to select the number of  
images, and press the 4 button.  
You can select 12, 24 or 36 images.  
When the number of saved images is smaller than the number selected,  
empty spaces will appear when [Layout] is set to o and some images  
may be duplicated for other layouts.  
6
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Backgrnd.],  
and press the four-way controller (5).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
195  
7
Use the four-way controller (23) to select the  
background color, and press the 4 button.  
You can select a white or black background.  
8
9
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Selection],  
and press the four-way controller (5).  
Use the four-way controller (23) to select a type of image  
selection, and press the 4 button.  
Picks images automatically from all of the images  
saved.  
u
w
Auto  
Lets you select images you want to include in the  
index image. If w is selected, [Select image(s)]  
appears and leads you to the image selection  
screen.  
Manual  
Picks images automatically from the folder selected.  
x
Folder name If x is selected, [Select a folder] appears and  
6
leads you to the folder selection screen.  
10 Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Create an  
index image], and press the 4 button.  
The index image is created and a confirmation screen appears.  
11 Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Save] or  
[Reshuffle], and press the 4 button.  
Save  
Saves the index image as a P (3072×2048) and C file.  
Reselects the images to be included in the index image and  
Reshuffle displays a new index image. However, if o is selected for  
[Layout], this item is not displayed.  
After the index image is saved, the camera returns to playback mode and  
the index image is displayed.  
Processing may take a while when creating an index image.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
196  
Developing RAW Images  
You can convert captured RAW images into JPEG images, and save them  
as new files.  
Only RAW images captured with this camera can be edited. RAW images  
captured with other cameras cannot be edited on this camera.  
Developing One RAW Image  
1
Select a RAW image in the single image display, and press  
the four-way controller (3).  
The playback mode palette appears.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select h (RAW  
Development), and press the 4 button.  
6
The screen to select a development method is displayed.  
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select [Developing a single  
image], and press the 4 button.  
Developing a singgle image  
The parameters saved in the image file  
Developing multiiple immages  
appear.  
Proceed to Step 6 if you do not need to  
change the parameters.  
OK OK  
MENU  
If there are no images that can be  
processed, [No image can be processed] appears.  
4
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to choose the parameter you  
100-0001  
Image Capture Settings  
want to change.  
You can select a different image by  
turning the front e-dial (R).  
OK  
MENU  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
197  
The following parameters can be changed.  
Parameter Value  
Page  
Aspect Ratio (K/J/I/L), JPEG  
Image Capture Settings Recorded Pixels *1, JPEG Quality, Color p.141  
Space  
Distortion Correction/Lateral Chromatic  
Aberration Adjustment (This can be  
selected only for images taken with a  
Lens Correction  
p.151  
Bright/Natural/Portrait/Landscape/  
Vibrant/Radiant/Muted/Bleach Bypass/  
Reversal Film/Monochrome/Cross  
Processing  
Custom Image  
White Balance  
p.155  
p.143  
F/G/H/^/JD/JN/JW/ JL/  
I/L/f/K/K  
Sensitivity  
-2.0 to +2.0  
High-ISO NR  
Shadow Correction  
p.98  
p.148  
6
*1 Select the JPEG recorded pixels corresponding to the aspect ratio.  
5
Use the four-way controller (45) to change the value.  
For Image Capture Settings and Lens Correction, press the four-way  
controller (5) and use the four-way controller (23) to select an item.  
For Custom Image and White Balance, press the four-way controller (5)  
to display the setting screen.  
6
7
Press the 4 button.  
The save confirmation screen appears.  
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Save as], and  
press the 4 button.  
The RAW image is developed and saved as a new JPEG image.  
8
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Continue] or  
[Exit], and press the 4 button.  
Select [Continue] to edit other images. The screen that was displayed in  
Step 4 appears again.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
198  
Developing Multiple RAW Images  
You can develop multiple RAW images with the same settings.  
1
Select [Developing multiple images] in Step 3 on p.196,  
and press the 4 button.  
Images are displayed in [4 Thumbnail Display], [9 Thumbnail Display],  
[16 Thumbnail Display] or [36 Thumbnail Display] (the display style that  
was selected last).  
2
Select the RAW images to be developed.  
Available operations  
Four-way controller Moves the selection frame.  
(2345)  
4 button  
Confirms/cancels the image selection.  
Rear e-dial (S) Displays the selected image in the single image display.  
Turn the front e-dial (R) to display the previous or  
next image.  
6
3
4
Press the M button.  
The development confirmation screen appears.  
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select [Develop images as  
shot] or [Develop images with  
Develop images as shot  
modified settings], and press the  
4 button.  
Develop imagges with  
modified ssettings  
To change parameters, select [Develop  
images with modified settings].  
OK OK  
MENU  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
199  
5
Use the four-way controller  
(2345) to set [JPEG Recorded  
Pixels] and [JPEG Quality].  
JPEG Recorded Pixels  
When [Develop images as shot] is selected  
in Step 4, select  
p
,
E
,
a
or  
f
for  
[JPEG Recorded Pixels].  
OK  
MENU  
When [Develop images with modified  
settings] is selected, refer to p.197 to  
change other parameters. All images are developed with the same settings.  
6
7
Press the 4 button.  
The save confirmation screen appears.  
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Save as], and  
press the 4 button.  
The selected RAW images are developed and saved as new JPEG  
images.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
200  
Connecting the Camera to an AV  
Device  
You can connect the camera to a TV or other device and play back  
captured images.  
• For an AV device with multiple video input terminals, check the operating  
manual of the device, and select a suitable video input terminal for  
connecting the camera.  
• If you intend to use the camera continuously for a long period, use of the  
optional AC adapter kit is recommended.  
Connecting the Camera to a Video Input  
Terminal  
You can connect the camera to a device with a video input terminal.  
Use the optional AV cable I-AVC7.  
6
1
Turn the AV device and camera off.  
2
Open the terminal cover of the camera, and connect the  
AV cable to the VIDEO/PC output terminal.  
3
Connect the other end of the cable to the input terminal on  
the AV device.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
201  
4
Turn the AV device and camera on.  
The camera turns on in video mode, and the camera information is  
displayed on the screen of the connected AV device.  
• You cannot adjust the volume on the camera while the camera is connected  
to an AV device. Adjust the volume on the AV device.  
• Movies are played back with monaural sound.  
• Images are output at normal resolution regardless of the resolution supported  
by the AV device. To output HD video, transfer to and play back on a  
computer.  
Setting the Video Output Format  
When the hometown is set at the time of initial setting (p.58), the video  
output format is set in accordance with that region. Depending on the  
country or region, images may fail to be played back with the set video  
output format. If this happens, change the setting.  
6
1
Select [Interface Options] in the [R Set-up 2] menu, and  
press the four-way controller (5).  
The [Interface Options] screen appears.  
2
3
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Video Out],  
and press the four-way controller (5).  
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [NTSC] or  
[PAL], and press the 4 button.  
Press the 3 button twice.  
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu item appears again.  
The video output format differs depending on the region. When you set [Time  
Setting] in the World Time setting (p.207) to X (Destination), the video output  
setting changes to the video output format for that city. Refer to “List of World  
Time Cities” (p.209) for cities that can be selected as a hometown or  
destination.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
202  
Memo  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 Changing Additional  
Settings  
This chapter describes how to change additional settings.  
How to Operate the Set-up Menu ......................204  
Camera Settings .................................................206  
File Management Settings .................................219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
204  
How to Operate the Set-up Menu  
The [R Set-up] menu offers you general settings related to the camera.  
For details on how to use the menus, refer to “Using the Menus” (p.39).  
Set-up Menu Items  
The following items are available in the [R Set-up 1-4] menus.  
Press the 3 button in capture/playback mode, and use the four-way  
controller (45) or rear e-dial (S) to display the [R Set-up 1-4] menus.  
Menu  
Item  
Function  
Page  
p.58  
Changes the language in which menus and  
messages appear.  
Language/u  
Date Adjustment Sets the date format and time.  
Sets the display of the local date and time of  
p.60  
World Time  
the specified city so they can be displayed on p.207  
the monitor in addition to the present location.  
7
Sets the text size of an item selected on the  
respective menu screens.  
R1 Text Size  
Sound Effects  
p.59  
Switches the operation sound on/off and  
p.206  
changes its volume.  
Sets the guide display and display color of the  
screen.  
LCD Display  
p.210  
LCD Display  
Settings  
Adjusts the brightness and the color of the  
monitor.  
p.211  
Flicker  
Reduction  
Cuts down on screen flicker by setting the  
p.27  
power frequency to that used in your region.  
Sets the output format when connecting to an  
p.201  
Video Out  
AV device with a video input terminal.  
R2  
USB  
Connection  
Sets the USB connection mode when  
p.233  
connecting to a computer.  
Sets the naming system for folders to store  
images.  
Folder Name  
p.221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
205  
Menu  
Item  
Function  
Page  
Create New  
Folder  
Creates a new folder on the SD Memory Card. p.222  
Sets the method used to assign file names for  
images.  
File Name  
p.223  
R2  
Copyright  
Information  
Sets the photographer and copyright  
p.224  
information embedded in Exif.  
Eye-Fi  
Sets when using an Eye-Fi card.  
p.226  
p.214  
automatically.  
Auto Power Off  
R3  
Selects the type of AA batteries used for the  
battery holder.  
AA Battery Type  
Reset  
p.214  
p.217  
p.213  
p.264  
p.265  
p.219  
p.218  
Resets all settings.  
Maps out and corrects any defective pixels on  
the CMOS sensor.  
Pixel Mapping  
Dust Removal  
Cleans the CMOS sensor by shaking it.  
Locks the mirror in the up position for cleaning  
the CMOS sensor with a blower.  
R4 Sensor Cleaning  
Format  
Formats an SD Memory Card.  
Firmware Info/  
Options  
Displays the camera’s firmware version.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
206  
Camera Settings  
Setting the Sound Effects, Date and Time, and  
Display Language  
Setting the Sound Effects  
You can turn the camera operation sound on or off, or change its volume.  
The sound for the following items can be set.  
• In-focus  
• AE-L (AE Lock operation sound)  
• Self-timer  
• Remote Control  
• One Push File Format (operation sound when [One Push File Format]  
is assigned to the V/Y button)  
• Press OK for 1 sec. (operation sound when changing AF point is  
enabled or disabled)  
1
Select [Sound Effects] in the [R Set-up 1] menu, and  
press the four-way controller (5).  
7
The [Sound Effects 1] screen appears.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (45) to adjust the volume.  
Select from six levels. When set to Z (0), you can turn all the sound  
effects off.  
Use the four-way controller (23)  
Sound Efffects  
Volume  
1 2  
to select an item, and use the  
four-way controller (45) to  
select O or P.  
In-focus  
AE-L  
Self-timer  
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to display the  
[Sound Effects 2] screen.  
Remote Control  
One Push Fiile Foormat  
MENU  
4
Press the 3 button twice.  
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu item appears again.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
207  
Setting the World Time  
The date and time set in “Initial Setting” (p.58) serve as the date and time  
of your present location. Setting the destination in [World Time] enables  
you to display the local date and time on the monitor when traveling  
abroad.  
1
Select [World Time] in the [R Set-up 1] menu, and press  
the four-way controller (5).  
The [World Time] screen appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller (45)  
to select X (Destination) or W  
World Time  
Time Setting  
(Hometown) for [Time Setting].  
Destination  
London  
This setting is reflected in the date and  
16:00  
time that appear in the control panel.  
Hometown  
New York  
10:00  
MENU  
3
4
Press the four-way controller (  
3
) to select [  
X
Destination],  
and press the four-way controller (  
The [X Destination] screen appears.  
5).  
7
Use the four-way controller (45)  
Destination  
to select a destination city.  
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to change the  
region.  
The location, time difference and current  
time of the selected city appear.  
London  
DST  
+6:00  
16:00  
Cancel  
OK OK  
MENU  
5
6
Press the four-way controller (3) to select [DST], and use  
the four-way controller (45) to select P or O.  
Select O if the destination city uses daylight saving time (DST).  
Press the 4 button.  
The destination setting is saved and the screen that was displayed in  
Step 2 appears again.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
208  
7
Press the 3 button twice.  
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu item appears  
again.  
• Refer to “List of World Time Cities” (p.209) for cities that can be selected as  
a destination or hometown.  
• Select [W Hometown] in Step 3 to change the city and DST setting.  
X appears in the control panel if [Time Setting] is set to [X Destination].  
Also, the video output setting (p.201) changes to the video output format for  
that city.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
209  
List of World Time Cities  
Video  
Output  
Format  
Video  
Output  
Format  
Region  
City  
Honolulu  
Region  
City  
Istanbul  
North  
America  
NTSC  
Africa/  
West Asia  
PAL  
Anchorage  
Vancouver  
San Francisco  
Los Angeles  
Calgary  
NTSC  
NTSC  
NTSC  
NTSC  
NTSC  
NTSC  
NTSC  
NTSC  
NTSC  
NTSC  
NTSC  
NTSC  
NTSC  
NTSC  
NTSC  
PAL  
Cairo  
PAL  
PAL  
PAL  
PAL  
PAL  
PAL  
PAL  
PAL  
PAL  
PAL  
PAL  
PAL  
PAL  
NTSC  
PAL  
PAL  
PAL  
PAL  
PAL  
PAL  
PAL  
PAL  
PAL  
PAL  
NTSC  
NTSC  
NTSC  
NTSC  
NTSC  
PAL  
PAL  
PAL  
PAL  
PAL  
PAL  
NTSC  
Jerusalem  
Nairobi  
Jeddah  
Tehran  
Denver  
Dubai  
Chicago  
Karachi  
Kabul  
Miami  
Toronto  
Male  
New York  
Halifax  
Delhi  
Colombo  
Kathmandu  
Dacca  
Central and Mexico City  
South  
America  
Lima  
Santiago  
Caracas  
Buenos Aires  
Sao Paulo  
Rio de Janeiro  
Lisbon  
East Asia  
Yangon  
Bangkok  
Kuala Lumpur  
Vientiane  
Singapore  
Phnom Penh  
Ho chi Minh  
Jakarta  
PAL  
NTSC  
PAL  
Europe  
7
Madrid  
PAL  
London  
PAL  
Paris  
PAL  
Hong Kong  
Beijing  
Amsterdam  
Milan  
PAL  
PAL  
Shanghai  
Manila  
Rome  
PAL  
Copenhagen  
Berlin  
PAL  
Taipei  
PAL  
Seoul  
Prague  
PAL  
Tokyo  
Stockholm  
Budapest  
Warsaw  
Athens  
PAL  
Guam  
PAL  
Oceania  
Perth  
PAL  
Adelaide  
Sydney  
Noumea  
Wellington  
Auckland  
Pago Pago  
PAL  
Helsinki  
Moscow  
Dakar  
PAL  
PAL  
Africa/  
PAL  
West Asia  
Algiers  
PAL  
Johannesburg  
PAL  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
210  
Setting the Monitor and the Menu Displays  
Setting the LCD Display  
You can set the display color of the guide display, status screen, control  
panel and menu selection cursor.  
1
Select [LCD Display] in the [R Set-up1] menu, and press  
the four-way controller (5).  
The [LCD Display] screen appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller (45)  
to select O or P for [Guide  
LCD Display  
Guide DDisplaay  
Display].  
Display Color  
1
1/125  
F5.6  
MENU  
7
3
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Display Color],  
and use the four-way controller (45) to select from  
twelve display colors.  
Press the 3 button twice.  
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu item appears  
again.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
211  
Adjusting the Brightness and the Color of the Monitor  
Adjusts the brightness and the color of the monitor.  
1
Select [LCD Display Settings] in the [R Set-up 1] menu,  
and press the four-way controller (5).  
The [LCD Display Settings] screen appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select [Brightness Level],  
LCD Display Settings  
Brightneess Level  
[Adjust: Blue-Amber], or [Adjust:  
Green-Magenta].  
Cancel  
OK OK  
MENU  
0
Brightness Level  
Changes the brightness of the monitor (-7 to +7).  
Adjusts the tone of the colors between blue (B7)  
and amber (A7).  
Adjust: Blue-Amber  
Adjusts the tone of the colors between green  
(G7) and magenta (M7).  
Adjust: Green-Magenta  
7
3
Use the four-way controller (45) to adjust the value.  
Available operations  
Rear e-dial (S)  
Displays a captured image in the background.  
| button  
Resets the adjustment value to the default  
setting.  
4
5
Press the 4 button.  
Press the 3 button.  
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu item appears  
again.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
212  
Setting the Display for Instant Review  
You can set the operation and display settings during Instant Review  
(p.66).  
1
Select [Instant Review] in the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu, and  
press the four-way controller (5).  
The [Instant Review] screen appears.  
2
Press the four-way controller  
(5), use the four-way controller  
(23) to select a display time,  
and press the 4 button.  
Instant RReview  
Display Time  
1sec.  
Enlarge Instant Review 3sec.  
Save RAW Data  
Histograam Display  
Bright/Daark Area  
5sec.  
Off  
Cancel  
OK OK  
MENU  
3
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Enlarge  
Instant Review], [Save RAW Data], [Histogram Display] or  
[Bright/Dark Area], and use the four-way controller (45)  
to select O or P.  
7
Enlarge Instant  
Review  
You can magnify the image on the monitor with the  
rear e-dial (S). (p.177)  
Sets whether to save the RAW image by pressing the  
m button when the file format of the last captured  
image is JPEG and its RAW data still remains in the  
buffer memory. (p.72)  
Save RAW Data  
Histogram Display Shows the brightness distribution of an image. (p.33)  
Bright (overexposed) portions blink red and dark  
Bright/Dark Area  
Press the 3 button twice.  
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu item appears  
again.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
213  
Setting the Initial Menu Tab to be Displayed  
Set the initial menu tab displayed on the monitor when the 3 button  
is pressed.  
1
Select [17. Save Menu Location] in the [A Custom Setting  
3] menu, and press the four-way controller (5).  
The [17. Save Menu Location] screen appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Reset Menu  
Location] or [Save Menu Location], and press the  
4
button.  
The [A Rec. Mode 1] menu ([C Movie 1] menu in  
Reset Menu Location C mode, and [Q Playback 1] menu in playback  
mode) is always displayed first. (default setting)  
Save Menu Location The menu tab last selected is displayed first.  
3
Press the 3 button.  
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu item appears again.  
7
Correcting Defective Pixels in the CMOS Sensor (Pixel Mapping)  
Pixel Mapping is a function for mapping out and correcting defective pixels  
in the CMOS sensor.  
Attach a proper lens to the camera before using Pixel Mapping.  
1
Select [Pixel Mapping] in the [R Set-up 4] menu, and press  
the four-way controller (5).  
The [Pixel Mapping] screen appears.  
2
Press the four-way controller (2) to select [Pixel  
Mapping], and press the 4 button.  
Defective pixels are mapped out and corrected, and the screen that was  
displayed before selecting the menu item appears again.  
• It takes about 30 seconds to map out and correct the defective pixels.  
• When the battery level is low, [Not enough battery power remaining to  
activate Pixel Mapping] is displayed on the monitor. Install a fully charged  
battery, or use the optional AC adapter kit.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
214  
Battery Settings  
Minimizing Battery Consumption  
You can set the camera to turn off automatically if unused after a certain  
length of time.  
Set in [Auto Power Off] of the [R Set-up 3] menu. Select from [1min.]  
(default setting), [3min.], [5min.], [10min.], [30min.], or [Off].  
• Perform any of the following operations to reactivate the camera from Auto  
Power Off.  
• Turn the camera off and on again.  
• Press the shutter release button halfway.  
• Press the 3 button or M button.  
• Auto Power Off does not function in the following situations:  
• when a slideshow is played back  
• when the camera is connected to an AV device with a USB cable  
• while transferring images via Eye-Fi card  
Setting the Battery Type  
7
When using the AA battery holder D-BH109, select the type of the AA  
batteries to use so the camera can determine the battery level correctly.  
The default setting is [Auto-detect].  
1
Select [AA Battery Type] in the [R Set-up 3] menu, and  
press the four-way controller (5).  
The [AA Battery Type] screen appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select a battery type, and  
1 2 3  
AA Battery Type  
Auto-deetect  
Lithium  
press the 4 button.  
Nickel-Metal HHydride  
Alkaline  
When set to [Auto-detect], the camera will  
automatically detect the type of batteries  
being used.  
Exit  
MENU  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
215  
3
Press the 3 button.  
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu item appears  
again.  
When the type of batteries actually being used is different from the item you  
selected here, the battery level will not be correctly determined. Please set the  
correct battery type. Usually, there is no problem using [Auto-detect], however  
it may take a while to detect the battery type. In low temperatures and when  
using batteries that were stored for long periods of time, set the appropriate  
battery type so the camera can correctly determine the remaining battery level.  
Selecting Settings to Save in the Camera  
(Memory)  
You can select which function settings to save when the camera is turned  
off. The following function settings can be saved.  
Default  
Setting  
Default  
Setting  
Function  
Flash Mode  
Function  
O
O
O
O
O
O
Flash Exposure Comp.  
Digital Filter  
O
P
7
Drive Mode  
White Balance  
Custom Image  
Sensitivity  
HDR Capture  
P
Shooting Info Display  
Playback Info Display  
File No.  
P
O
O
EV Compensation  
This setting cannot be performed when the mode dial is set to B or C.  
1
Select [Memory] in the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu, and press  
the four-way controller (5).  
The [Memory 1] screen appears.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
216  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select an item, and use the  
four-way controller (45) to  
select O or P.  
Memory  
1 2  
Flashh Mode  
Drive Mode  
White Baalance  
Custom Image  
Sensitivity  
EV Compennsation  
Flash Expossure CComp.  
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to display the  
[Memory 2] screen.  
MENU  
O
P
Settings are saved even when the camera is turned off.  
Settings are returned to their default values when the camera is  
turned off.  
Press the 3 button twice.  
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu item appears again.  
• In [Shooting Info Display], you can set whether to save the type of information  
displayed in standby mode. (p.29)  
The status screen is always displayed first when the camera is  
turned on.  
P
The display selected from the Shooting Info Display selection  
O
screen (other than [Electronic Compass]) appears when the  
camera is turned on.  
7
• Set [File No.] to O to continue the sequential numbering (four digits) for the  
file name even if a new folder is created.  
The file number of the last image saved to the previous folder is  
O
P
saved and subsequent images are assigned sequential file  
numbers even if a new folder is created.  
The file number of the first image saved to a folder returns to 0001  
each time a new folder is created for saving images.  
• When [Reset] of the [R Set-up 3] menu is performed, all Memory settings  
return to the default values. (p.217)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
217  
Resetting the Camera Settings  
Resets the settings you selected in the menu screen to the default values.  
You cannot reset the settings when the mode dial is set to B or C.  
Resetting the Rec. Mode/Movie/Playback/Set-up Menus  
Settings of the direct keys and for the items of the [A Rec. Mode] menu,  
[C Movie] menu, [Q Playback] menu, [R Set-up] menu, and playback  
mode palette can be reset to default values.  
1
Select [Reset] in the [R Set-up 3] menu, and press the  
four-way controller (5).  
The [Reset] screen appears.  
2
Press the four-way controller (2) to select [Reset], and  
press the 4 button.  
7
The settings are reset, and the screen that was displayed before  
selecting the menu item appears again.  
The following settings are not reset.  
- Saved USER mode settings  
- Language/u  
- Flicker Reduction  
- Video Out  
- Date Adjustment  
- Copyright Information  
-
The city and DST settings for World Time - [A Custom Setting] menu items  
Resetting the Custom Menu  
Settings for the items of the [A Custom Setting] menu can be reset to  
default values.  
1
Select [Reset Custom Functions] in the [A Custom Setting  
3] menu, and press the four-way controller (5).  
The [Reset Custom Functions] screen appears.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
218  
2
Press the four-way controller (2) to select [Reset], and  
press the 4 button.  
The settings are reset, and the screen that was displayed before  
selecting the menu item appears again.  
Checking the Camera Version Information  
You can check the version information for software (firmware) in the  
camera. If an update file for the firmware is released, you can update the  
camera to the latest firmware version.  
Visit our website for more information and procedural details regarding  
updates.  
1
Select [Firmware Info/Options] in the [R Set-up 4] menu,  
and press the four-way controller (5).  
The firmware version for the camera is  
Firmwware Inffoo/Options  
displayed on the [Firmware Info/Options]  
Camera  
screen.  
7
Ver:X.XX  
At this point, if an update file is saved on  
your SD Memory Card, you can run the  
update.  
MENU  
2
Press the 3 button twice.  
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu item appears again.  
• You cannot restore a camera to its previous firmware version after updating  
it.  
• Before running the update, be sure to save the data on your SD Memory Card  
to a computer or other location.  
When the battery level is low, [Not enough battery power remaining to update  
the firmware] is displayed on the monitor. Install a fully charged battery, or use  
the optional AC adapter kit.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
219  
File Management Settings  
Formatting an SD Memory Card  
Use this camera to format (initialize) an SD Memory Card that is unused  
or has been used on other devices.  
Formatting deletes all the data saved on the SD Memory Card.  
• Do not remove the SD Memory Card while formatting. The card may be  
damaged and become unusable.  
• Formatting deletes all data, both protected and unprotected.  
1
Select [Format] in the [R Set-up 4] menu, and press the  
four-way controller (5).  
The [Format] screen appears.  
2
Press the four-way controller (2)  
to select [Format], and press the  
4 button.  
Format  
All datta willl be delleted  
ġ
7
Formatting starts.  
Format  
When formatting is completed, the screen  
that was displayed before selecting the  
Cancel  
OK OK  
menu item appears again.  
When an SD Memory Card is formatted, the volume label assigned to the card  
is “K-500”. When this camera is connected to a computer, the SD Memory Card  
is recognized as a removable disk with the name “K-500”.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
220  
Protecting Images from Deletion (Protect)  
You can protect images from being accidentally deleted.  
Even protected images are deleted if the inserted SD Memory Card is  
formatted.  
1
Press the four-way controller (3) in the single image  
display of playback mode.  
The playback mode palette appears.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select Z  
(Protect), and press the 4 button.  
The screen to select how to change the settings is displayed.  
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select [Single image] or [All  
images], and press the 4  
Singlee image  
button.  
All images  
If you selected [All images], proceed to  
7
Step 5.  
OK OK  
MENU  
4
5
Turn the front e-dial (R) to select an image.  
Press the four-way controller (2)  
to select [Protect], and press the  
100-0001  
4 button.  
Select [Unprotect] to cancel the  
protection of the image.  
Protect  
The image is protected and the Y icon  
appears at the top right of the screen.  
Repeat Steps 4 and 5 to protect other  
images.  
Unprotect  
Exit  
OK OK  
MENU  
If you selected [All images] in Step 3, the camera returns to the single  
image display.  
6
Press the 3 button.  
The camera returns to the single image display.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
221  
Setting the Naming System of the Folder  
When images are captured with this camera, a folder is automatically  
created and the captured images are stored in the new folder. Each folder  
name consists of a sequential number from 100 to 999 and a string of 5  
characters. The string of characters can be changed.  
1
Select [Folder Name] in the [R Set-up 2] menu, and press  
the four-way controller (5).  
2
Press the four-way controller (5), use the four-way  
controller (23) to select [Date] or [PENTX], and press the  
4 button.  
The two digits of the month and day on which the picture was taken  
are assigned as the folder name in the form of [xxx_MMDD].  
(default setting)  
[MMDD] (month and day) appears according to the display  
Date  
format set in [Date Adjustment] (p.60).  
Example: 101_0125 (folder for images taken on January 25th)  
7
The folder name is assigned in the form of [xxxPENTX].  
“PENTX” can be changed to a string of characters of your  
PENTX  
choice.  
Example: 101PENTX  
If you selected [Date], proceed to Step 6.  
3
4
Press the four-way controller (3), select [***PENTX] and  
press the four-way controller (5).  
The text-entry screen appears.  
Change the text.  
Folder Name  
Text selection  
cursor  
Finish  
Text input cursor  
Reset  
Cancel  
OK Enter  
MENU  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
222  
Available operations  
Four-way controller  
(2345)  
Moves the text selection cursor.  
Moves the text input cursor.  
Rear e-dial (S)  
4 button  
Enters a character selected with the text selection  
cursor at the position of the text input cursor.  
d button  
Returns the folder name to [PENTX].  
5
6
After entering the text, move the text selection cursor to  
[Finish], and press the 4 button.  
The folder name is changed.  
Press the 3 button twice.  
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu item appears  
again.  
A maximum of 500 images can be stored in a single folder. When the number  
of captured images exceeds 500, a new folder is created to store the additional  
images. In Exposure Bracketing shooting, images will be stored in the same  
folder until shooting is completed, even if the number of images exceeds 500.  
7
Creating New Folders  
You can create a new folder on the SD Memory Card. A folder is created with  
the number following the number of the folder currently being used. The newly  
created folder is used to store images starting with the next captured image.  
1
Select [Create New Folder] in the [R Set-up 2] menu, and  
press the four-way controller (5).  
The [Create New Folder] screen appears.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
223  
2
Press the four-way controller (2)  
to select [Create folder], and  
press the 4 button.  
Create New Folder  
Creates a nnew stoorage ffolder  
with thhe folllowingg name:  
101PENTX  
A folder with a new number is created.  
Create folder  
Cancel  
OK OK  
Only one folder can be created using this operation. Multiple empty folders  
cannot be created consecutively.  
Setting the File Name  
You can change the file names of images.  
The default naming conventions are as follows depending on the [Color  
Space] (p.142) setting in [Image Capture Settings] of the [A Rec. Mode  
1] menu.  
“xxxx” indicates the file number, and is displayed as a four-digit sequential  
number.  
7
Color Space  
sRGB  
File Name  
IMGPxxxx.JPG  
_IMGxxxx.JPG  
AdobeRGB  
For sRGB, you can change [IMGP] (4 characters) to the desired  
characters.  
For AdobeRGB, of the 4 characters you selected, the first 3 are assigned  
in place of [IMG].  
Example: When set to [ABCDxxxx.JPG], files are named  
[_ABCxxxx.JPG] for AdobeRGB.  
1
Select [File Name] in the [R Set-up 2] menu and press the  
four-way controller (5).  
The [File Name] screen appears.  
2
Press the four-way controller (5).  
The text-entry screen appears.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
224  
3
Change the text.  
Enter the text in the same way as [Folder Name]. Refer to Steps 4 to 6  
on p.221.  
Selecting the File Number Setting  
You can select a method for assigning the file number of an image when  
saved to a new folder. Set in [File No.] of [Memory] (p.215) in the [A Rec.  
Mode 4] menu.  
The file number of the last image saved to the previous folder is saved and  
O
P
subsequent images are assigned sequential file numbers even if a new  
folder is created.  
time a new folder is created for saving images.  
Setting the Photographer Information  
The camera type, shooting conditions and other information are  
automatically embedded in captured images in Exif data format. You can  
embed photographer information in this Exif.  
7
Use the provided software (p.235) to check the Exif information.  
1
Select [Copyright Information] in the [R Set-up 2] menu,  
and press the four-way controller (5).  
The [Copyright Information] screen appears.  
2
Use the four-way controller (45)  
to select P or O.  
Copyright Innformmaation  
Embedd Copyyrright Data  
Photogrrapher  
Does not embed copyright  
information in the Exif. (default  
setting)  
P
Copyrightt Holder  
Embeds copyright information in  
the Exif.  
MENU  
O
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
225  
3
4
Use the four-way controller (23) to select  
[Photographer], and press the four-way controller (5).  
The text-entry screen appears.  
Enter the text.  
Photogrrapher  
Textselection  
cursor  
Up to 32 single-byte  
alphanumeric  
Finish  
characters and  
symbols can be  
entered.  
Text input cursor  
Delete One Chharacter  
Cancel  
OK Enter  
MENU  
Available operations  
Four-way controller  
(2345)  
Moves the text selection cursor.  
Moves the text input cursor.  
Rear e-dial (S)  
m button  
Switches between upper and lower case  
letters.  
4 button  
Enters a character selected with the text  
selection cursor at the position of the text input  
cursor.  
7
U/i button  
Deletes a character at the position of the text  
input cursor.  
5
6
7
After entering the text, move the text selection cursor to  
[Finish], and press the 4 button.  
The camera returns to the [Copyright Information] screen.  
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Copyright  
Holder], and enter the text in the same way as  
[Photographer].  
Press the 3 button twice.  
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu item appears  
again.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
226  
Using an Eye-Fi Card  
You can transfer images to your computer via wireless LAN by using an  
SD Memory Card with a built-in wireless LAN (Eye-Fi card).  
• Be sure to set up a wireless LAN access point on a computer in advance for  
the Eye-Fi card connection. It cannot be set up on the camera.  
• Images are not transferred in the following cases:  
• when an image has already been transferred  
• when the size of a movie is 2 GB or more  
• when an Eye-Fi card is write protected  
• when a wireless LAN access point cannot be found  
• when the battery level is low (battery level is F (red))  
• For RAW images and movie files, the success of transfer depends on the  
specifications and settings of the Eye-Fi card in use.  
1
Select [Eye-Fi] in the [R Set-up 2] menu, and press the  
four-way controller (5).  
The [Eye-Fi] screen appears.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Eye-Fi  
Communication], and press the four-way controller (5).  
7
Use the four-way controller (23)  
Eye-Fi  
to select the action, and press the  
4 button.  
Eye-Fi CCommuunication  
Communication Info  
Automatticallly trannsfers  
unsent imaages frroom memorry card  
Cancel  
OK OK  
MENU  
Images that have not been transferred will be transferred  
automatically. Images will also be transferred when images  
are taken, new images are saved, or images are overwritten.  
AUTO  
Transfers the unsent images on the card that are  
selected in playback mode (p.227).  
SELECT  
OFF  
Turns off the wireless LAN function.  
4
Press the 3 button twice.  
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu item appears again.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
227  
• When an Eye-Fi card is used, a new folder is created for every 100 images  
saved.  
• Auto Power Off does not function when images are being transferred.  
• When transferring a large number of images, use the optional AC adapter kit  
or install a fully charged battery. If the internal temperature of the camera  
becomes high during transferring images, the camera may be turned off  
automatically to protect the camera circuitry. In such a case, turn on the  
camera again after a while, and data transfer will resume.  
• Select [Communication Info] in Step 2 on p.226 to check the firmware version  
of the Eye-Fi card.  
Transferring Selected Images  
When [SELECT] is set in Step 3 on p.226, only the selected images are  
transferred.  
1
Press the four-way controller (3) in the single image  
display of playback mode.  
The playback mode palette appears.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select N (Eye-Fi  
Image Transfer), and press the 4 button.  
The screen to select the unit of transfer appears.  
7
Use the four-way controller (23) to select the unit of  
transfer, and press the 4 button.  
Enables selecting individual images (in one folder, up to  
100 images).  
Select image(s) • For images taken with [File Format] set to [RAW+],  
JPEG and RAW files saved are counted as one image,  
and both files are transferred.  
Transfers all of the images stored in the selected folder.  
Select a folder • Up to 100 images that can be transferred from the  
selected folder are transferred.  
The folder selection screen appears.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
228  
4
5
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select the folder  
to transfer, and press the 4 button.  
When [Select image(s)] is selected, the screen to select the image(s)  
appears.  
When [Select a folder] is selected, the transfer confirmation screen  
appears. Proceed to Step 7.  
Select the image(s) to transfer.  
-
002/100  
100 0202  
Images with the C, O, or ? icon shown  
on the thumbnail cannot be selected.  
Cancel OK  
Finish  
INFO  
MENU  
Available operations  
Four-way controller  
Moves the selection frame.  
(2345)  
Rear e-dial (S)  
Displays the selected image in the single image  
display when turned to the right; returns to  
thumbnail display when turned to the left.  
4 button  
Confirms/cancels the image selection.  
7
6
7
Press the M button.  
The images to be transferred are specified.  
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Transfer], and  
press the 4 button.  
After the message [Transfer request accepted] appears, the camera  
returns to the single image display.  
• Transferring process cannot be canceled once started.  
• Only images captured in JPEG (.JPG) or RAW (.DNG) format can be  
selected. Movies and Interval Movies cannot be selected.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
229  
Setting the DPOF Settings  
By adding DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) settings to stored images on  
the SD Memory Card, you can specify the number of copies and whether  
to imprint the date on the images in advance and order conventional  
photograph prints by taking this SD Memory Card to a store for printing.  
• DPOF settings cannot be applied to RAW images and movies.  
• You can make DPOF settings for up to 999 images.  
1
Press the four-way controller (3) in the single image  
display of playback mode.  
The playback mode palette appears.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (2345) to select r (DPOF),  
and press the 4 button.  
The screen to select how to change the settings is displayed.  
Use the four-way controller (23)  
to select [Single image] or [All  
7
images], and press the 4  
Singlee image  
button.  
All images  
If you selected [All images], proceed to  
Step 5.  
OK OK  
MENU  
4
5
Turn the front e-dial (R) to  
select an image.  
100-0001  
Copies  
Date  
00  
Date  
INFO  
OK OK  
MENU  
Use the four-way controller (23) to select the number of copies.  
You can set up to 99 copies.  
K appears at the top right of the screen for images with DPOF settings.  
To cancel the DPOF settings, set the number of copies to [00].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
230  
6
7
Press the M button to select P or O for printing the  
date.  
P
The date is not printed.  
The date is printed.  
O
Repeat Steps 4 to 6 to make DPOF settings for other images.  
Press the 4 button.  
The DPOF settings for the selected image or all images are saved and  
the camera returns to the single image display.  
• Depending on the printer or printing equipment at the photo processing lab,  
the date may not be printed on the pictures.  
• The number of copies specified for all images is applied to all the images, and  
that specified for a single image is canceled.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
8 Connecting to a  
Computer  
This chapter explains how to connect the camera to a  
computer, install the supplied software on the CD-ROM,  
etc.  
Manipulating Captured Images on a  
Computer ............................................................232  
Saving Images on a Computer ..........................233  
Using the Provided Software ............................235  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
232  
Manipulating Captured Images on a  
Computer  
The captured still pictures and movies can be transferred to a computer by  
connecting the camera using a USB cable, and RAW images can be  
developed using the provided software “SILKYPIX Developer Studio 3.0  
LE”.  
When connecting the camera to a computer and using the software, we  
recommend using a computer with the following system requirements.  
Windows  
Windows XP (SP3 or later, 32-bit Home/Pro), Windows Vista (32-bit,  
64-bit), Windows 7 (32-bit, 64-bit), Windows 8 (32-bit, 64-bit)  
• Installation requires administrator rights  
OS  
• Can be run as a 32-bit application on any 64-bit Edition of Windows  
Intel Pentium-compatible processor (Pentium 4, Athlon XP or higher  
recommended)  
CPU  
• Supports multi-core processors (Intel Core i5, i7; Core 2 Quad, Duo;  
AMD Phenom II X4, X6; Athlon II X2, X4; and other)  
RAM  
HDD  
1 GB minimum (2 GB or more recommended)  
For installing and starting up the program: 100 MB minimum of free space  
For saving image files: Approx. 10 MB/file  
Monitor 1024×768 dots, 24-bit full color or higher  
Others Input devices such as a keyboard and mouse  
8
Macintosh  
OS  
Mac OS X 10.5, 10.6, 10.7 or 10.8  
CPU  
RAM  
Intel processor-compatible, Power PC  
1 GB minimum (2 GB or more recommended)  
For installing and starting up the program: 100 MB minimum of free space  
For saving image files: Approx. 10 MB/file  
HDD  
Monitor 1024×768 dots, 24-bit full color or higher  
Others Input devices such as a keyboard and mouse  
• Use the provided software to develop RAW images captured with this  
camera.  
• QuickTime is required to play back movies transferred to a computer. You  
can download it from the following site:  
http://www.apple.com/quicktime/  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
233  
Saving Images on a Computer  
Setting the USB Connection Mode  
Set the USB connection mode when connecting the camera to a  
computer.  
1
Select [Interface Options] in the [R Set-up 2] menu, and  
press the four-way controller (5).  
The [Interface Options] screen appears.  
2
3
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [USB  
Connection], and press the four-way controller (5).  
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [MSC] or [PTP],  
and press the 4 button.  
Mass Storage Class (default setting)  
MSC A general-purpose driver program that handles devices connected  
to a computer via USB as a memory device.  
Picture Transfer Protocol  
PTP A protocol that allows transfer of digital images and control of digital  
cameras via USB.  
8
Unless otherwise specified, select [MSC].  
4
Press the 3 button twice.  
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu item appears  
again.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
234  
Connecting the Camera and a Computer  
Connect the camera to a computer using the provided USB cable I-USB7.  
1
Turn the computer on.  
2
Turn the camera off, and use the USB cable to connect the  
VIDEO/PC terminal of the camera and the computer.  
3
Turn the camera on.  
The camera is recognized as a removable disk or an SD Memory Card  
with a volume label “K-500”.  
8
If the “K-500” dialog appears when the camera is turned on, select [Open  
folder to view files using Windows Explorer] and click the OK button.  
4
5
Save the captured images to the computer.  
Copy the image file(s) or folder(s) to the hard disk of the computer.  
Disconnect the camera from the computer.  
The camera cannot be operated while it is connected to the computer. Turn off  
the camera and remove the USB cable to enable operating the camera.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
235  
Using the Provided Software  
“SILKYPIX Developer Studio 3.0 LE” is included on the CD-ROM (S-  
SW133). With the SILKYPIX Developer Studio 3.0 LE, you can develop  
RAW files, adjust the color of the images and other settings, and save the  
new images in JPEG or TIFF format.  
Installing the Software  
You can install the software from the provided CD-ROM.  
When multiple accounts have been set up on a computer, log on with an  
account that has administrative rights before installing the software.  
1
Turn the computer on.  
Make sure no other software is running.  
2
Place the CD-ROM into the CD/DVD drive on the computer.  
The [Software Installer] screen appears.  
If the [Software Installer] screen does not appear  
• For Windows  
8
1 Click [My Computer] from the Start menu.  
2 Double-click the [CD/DVD drive (S-SW133)] icon.  
3 Double-click the [Setup.exe] icon.  
• For Macintosh  
1 Double-click the CD/DVD (S-SW133) icon on the desktop.  
2 Double-click the [PENTAX Installer] icon.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
236  
3
Click [SILKYPIX Developer  
Studio 3.0 LE].  
For Macintosh, follow the instructions  
on the screen to perform subsequent  
steps.  
4
5
Select the desired language in the [Choose Setup  
Language] screen, and click [OK].  
When the [InstallShield Wizard] screen appears in the  
selected language, click [Next].  
Follow the instructions on the screen to perform subsequent steps.  
Start SILKYPIX Developer Studio 3.0 LE and see the help menu for details on  
using the software program.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
237  
Regarding User Registration  
To better serve you, please take a moment to register your software.  
Click [User Registration] on the  
screen in Step 3 on p.236.  
A world map for Internet User  
Registration is displayed.If the  
computer is connected to the  
Internet, click the displayed country  
or area and then follow the  
instructions to register your software.  
Note that you can only register online  
if your country or area is shown.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
238  
Memo  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9 Using the Flash  
This chapter provides details on the built-in flash and  
describes how to take pictures with an external flash.  
Using the Built-in Flash .....................................240  
Using an External Flash (Optional) ..................243  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
240  
Using the Built-in Flash  
Flash Characteristics in Each Exposure Mode  
Using the Flash in b Mode  
Any desired shutter speed of 1/180 sec. or slower can be set.  
Using the Flash in c Mode  
The shutter speed automatically changes over a range from 1/180 sec. to  
a slow shutter speed that reduces camera shake (the slowest shutter  
speed depends on the focal length of the lens in use).  
The shutter speed is locked at 1/180 sec. when a lens other than a DA,  
DA L, D FA, FA J, FA or F lens is used.  
Using the Slow-speed Sync Flash  
You can use Slow-speed Sync in . (Night Scene Portrait) of H mode  
or b, L or a mode when shooting portraits with the sunset in the  
background. Both the portrait and the background are captured  
beautifully. G and H can be used in e, K or c mode.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
241  
Using e/K/c Mode  
1
Set the mode dial to e, K or c.  
2
Press the E button.  
The built-in flash pops up.  
3
Set the flash mode to G or H.  
The shutter speed is set slower to give a proper exposure for the  
background.  
4
Take a picture.  
Using b/L/a Mode  
1
Set the mode dial to b, L or a.  
2
3
Set the flash mode to E or F.  
Set the shutter speed (for b mode) or shutter speed and  
aperture value (for L or a mode).  
Set so a proper exposure is obtained at a shutter speed of 1/180 seconds  
or slower.  
9
4
5
Press the E button.  
The built-in flash pops up.  
Take a picture.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
242  
Distance and Aperture when Using the Built-in Flash  
Relationships among the guide number, aperture and distance must be  
considered when shooting with the flash to obtain a correct exposure.  
Calculate the shooting distance or aperture value in the following way, and  
adjust the shooting conditions if the flash output is not sufficient.  
Built-in Flash  
Guide Number  
Approx. 12  
Approx. 17  
Approx. 24  
Approx. 34  
Approx. 48  
Built-in Flash  
Guide Number  
Approx. 68  
ISO Sensitivity  
ISO Sensitivity  
ISO 100  
ISO 200  
ISO 400  
ISO 800  
ISO 1600  
ISO 3200  
ISO 6400  
ISO 12800  
ISO 25600  
ISO 51200  
Approx. 96  
Approx. 136  
Approx. 192  
Approx. 272  
Calculating Shooting Distance from Aperture Value  
The following equation calculates the effective distance of the flash.  
Maximum flash distance L1 = Guide number ÷ Aperture value  
Minimum flash distance L2 = Maximum flash distance ÷ 5 *  
* The value used in the formula above is a fixed value which  
applies only when using the built-in flash alone.  
Example:  
When the sensitivity is ISO 200 and the aperture value is F5.6:  
L1 = 17 ÷ 5.6 = approx. 3 (m)  
L2 = 3 ÷ 5 = approx. 0.6 (m)  
Therefore, the flash can be used in a range of about 0.6 m to 3 m.  
However, the built-in flash in this camera cannot be used when the  
distance is 0.7 m or less. When the flash is used at distances closer  
than 0.7 m, it causes vignetting in the picture corners, light is  
distributed unevenly and the picture may be overexposed.  
9
Calculating Aperture Value from Shooting Distance  
The following equation calculates the correct aperture value.  
Aperture value F = Guide number ÷ Shooting distance  
Example:  
When the sensitivity is ISO 200 and the shooting distance is 4 m:  
F = 17 ÷ 4 = approx. 4.2  
If the resulting number (4.2, in the above example) is not available  
as a lens aperture, a smaller number that is closest (4.0, in the  
above example) is generally used.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
243  
Using an External Flash (Optional)  
Using an optional external flash AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ, AF200FG or  
AF160FC enables a variety of flash modes such as P-TTL auto flash  
mode.  
z: Available  
#: Some functions are restricted.  
×: Functions are unavailable.  
Flash  
Built-in  
Flash  
AF540FGZ AF200FG  
AF360FGZ AF160FC  
Camera Function  
Red-eye reduction flash  
Auto flash discharge  
z
z
z
z
z
z
Automatically switching to the flash sync  
speed  
z
z
z
z
z
z
Aperture value is automatically set in  
mode  
e
and  
b
P-TTL auto flash  
z*1  
z
z
×
z*1  
z
z*1  
z
z
×
Slow-speed Sync  
Flash exposure compensation  
AF assist light of external flash  
z
z
*2  
z
z
×
Trailing Curtain Sync  
*3  
*4  
Contrast control sync flash  
Slave flash  
#
z
#
×
×
z
×
×
×
High-speed sync  
Wireless flash  
z
z*5  
9
*4  
#
*1 Available only when using a DA, DA L, D FA, FA J, FA, F or A lens.  
*2 Shutter speed of 1/90 sec. or slower.  
*3 When combined with the AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ, 1/3 of the flash discharge can be  
output by the built-in flash and 2/3 can be output by the external flash.  
*4 Available only when combined with the AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ.  
*5 Multiple AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ units, or a combination of an AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ  
unit and the built-in flash is required.  
• Flashes with reversed polarity (the center contact on the hot shoe is minus)  
cannot be used due to the risk of damaging the camera and/or flash.  
• Do not combine with accessories that have a different number of contacts,  
such as a Hot Shoe Grip, as a malfunction may occur.  
• Combining with flashes from other manufacturers may cause equipment  
breakdown. We recommend using the AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ or AF200FG.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
244  
Using the P-TTL Auto Flash  
You can use the P-TTL auto flash with an AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ,  
AF200FG or AF160FC flash unit.  
1
Remove the cover of the hot shoe, and attach the external  
flash.  
2
3
4
Turn on the camera and the external flash.  
Set the external flash mode to [P-TTL].  
Make sure that the external flash is fully charged, and then  
take a picture.  
The b will light in the viewfinder or Live View screen when the flash is  
ready (fully charged).  
• For details such as operation method and effective distance, refer to the  
external flash manual.  
• Never press the E button when any external flash unit is attached to the  
camera. The built-in flash will hit the external flash. If you want to use both at  
once, set the wireless mode or connect them using the extension cord.  
(p.248)  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
245  
Using the High-speed Sync Flash  
With an AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ flash unit, you can discharge a flash to  
take a picture at a shutter speed faster than 1/180 seconds.  
1
Remove the cover of the hot shoe, and attach the external  
flash.  
2
3
4
Set the mode dial to b or a.  
Turn on the camera and the external flash.  
Set the external flash sync mode to HSb (high-speed  
sync).  
5
Make sure that the external flash is fully charged, and then  
take a picture.  
The b will light in the viewfinder or Live View screen when the flash is  
ready (fully charged).  
High-speed sync is available only when the shutter speed is set faster than  
1/180 sec.  
• High-speed sync is not available in p mode.  
• High-speed sync is not available with the built-in flash.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
246  
Using Flash in Wireless Mode  
By using two external flashes (AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ) or using the  
built-in flash with one or more external flashes, you can shoot in P-TTL  
flash mode without connecting the flash units with a cord.  
• Set the external flash to WIRELESS.  
• Two or more AF540FGZ/AF360FGZ external flashes are required to use the  
high-speed sync flash in wireless mode. This function cannot be used in  
combination with the built-in flash.  
• Set the wireless mode of the external flash not directly connected to the  
camera to SLAVE.  
Setting the Channel for the External Flash  
First, set the channel for the external flash unit.  
1
Set the channel for the external flash unit.  
2
Remove the cover of the hot shoe, and attach the external  
flash.  
3
Turn on the camera and the external flash, and press the  
shutter release button halfway.  
The built-in flash is set to the same channel as the external flash unit.  
9
Be sure to set all the flashes to the same channel. Refer to the manual of the  
AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ for details on how to set the channel on the external  
flash.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
247  
Wireless Shooting Using a Combination of the Built-in  
Flash and an External Flash Unit  
Set the camera to wireless flash mode when using an external flash in  
combination with the built-in flash.  
1
Remove the external flash unit after the channel is set on  
the camera, and place it at the desired location.  
2
Set the camera’s flash mode to  
r.  
Wireless Mode  
The camera is ready to take a picture.  
The channel for the built-in flash is  
0.0  
displayed in the viewfinder.  
Cancel  
OK OK  
MENU  
3
4
Press the E button.  
Confirm that both flashes are fully charged, and then take  
a picture.  
r is not available in the following situations.  
• In C mode  
• when the drive mode is set to [Remote Control (3 sec. delay)]  
• when the lens aperture ring is set to a position other than s  
9
You can change the built-in flash discharge method used in wireless mode. Set  
in [16. Flash in Wireless Mode] of the [A Custom Setting 3] menu.  
Discharges the built-in flash as a master flash. (default  
setting)  
On  
Off  
Discharges the built-in flash as a control flash.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
248  
Wireless Shooting Using a Combination of External  
Flash Units  
1
Set the wireless mode of the external flash directly  
connected to the camera to [MASTER] or [CONTROL].  
Discharge both the flash directly connected to the  
MASTER  
camera and the wireless flash unit as the main flash.  
Discharges the flash directly connected to the camera as  
CONTROL  
a control flash only, not as the main flash.  
2
3
On the wireless remote flash unit, set the wireless flash  
mode to [SLAVE] and set the channel to the same channel  
as the flash directly connected to the camera. Then, place  
it at the desired location.  
Confirm that both flashes are fully charged, and then take  
a picture.  
• The Shake Reduction function is not available.  
• When using multiple AF540FGZ/AF360FGZ external flashes and shooting  
with the high-speed sync flash in wireless mode, set the flash directly  
connected to the camera to high-speed sync flash mode.  
9
Connecting an External Flash with an  
Extension Cord  
When using an external flash away from the camera, attach the Hot Shoe  
Adapter FG (1; optional) to the camera hot shoe and an Off-Camera Shoe  
Adapter F (2; optional) to the bottom of the external flash, and then  
connect these with the Extension Cord F5P (3; optional). The Off-  
Camera Shoe Adapter F can be mounted to your tripod using the tripod  
screw.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
249  
When combining with the built-in flash  
2
1
3
Multiple Flash Shooting Using Extension Cords  
You can combine two or more external flashes (AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ or  
AF200FG).  
For connecting an AF540FGZ flash unit, you can use the extension cord  
connection terminal on the flash. For connecting an AF360FGZ or  
AF200FG flash unit, as shown in the illustration, connect an external flash  
and the Hot Shoe Adapter F (4; optional) to the Off-Camera Shoe  
Adapter F (2; optional) and then connect another Off-Camera Shoe  
Adapter F (2) with external flash using the Extension Cord F5P (3;  
optional).  
Refer to the manual of the flash for details.  
When combining two external flashes  
2
4
9
3
3
1
2
When using multiple external flashes or using an external flash with the built-in  
flash, P-TTL is used for flash control.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
250  
Using the Contrast Control Sync Flash  
Combining two or more external flashes (AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ or  
AF200FG) or using an external flash in combination with the built-in flash  
allows multiple flash photography (contrast control sync flash  
photography). This is based on the difference between the amounts of  
light discharged from multiple units.  
The AF200FG must be combined with the AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ.  
1
Connect the external flash to the camera indirectly.  
Refer to p.248 for details.  
2
3
Set the sync mode for the external flash to contrast-  
control-sync mode.  
Confirm that both the external flash and built-in flash are  
fully charged and then take a picture.  
• When using two or more external flashes and the contrast control sync mode  
is set on the external master flash unit, the flash output ratio is 2 (master unit)  
: 1 (slave units). When an external flash is used in combination with the built-  
in flash, the flash output ratio is 2 (external flash) : 1 (built-in flash).  
• When using multiple external flashes or using an external flash with the built-  
in flash, P-TTL is used for flash control.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
10 Appendix  
Default Settings ..................................................252  
Functions Available with Various Lens  
Combinations .....................................................259  
Cleaning the CMOS Sensor ...............................264  
Using the GPS Unit ............................................267  
Error Messages ..................................................270  
Troubleshooting .................................................273  
Main Specifications ............................................276  
Index ....................................................................283  
WARRANTY POLICY ..........................................290  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
252  
Default Settings  
The table below shows the factory default settings.  
The functions set in Memory (p.215) are saved even when the camera is  
turned off.  
Reset Setting  
Yes: The setting returns to the default setting with the reset function  
(p.217).  
No: The setting is saved even after reset.  
Direct Keys  
Reset  
Setting  
Item  
Default Setting  
Page  
p.87  
ISO AUTO  
(ISO 100 to 3200)  
Sensitivity  
Yes  
White Balance  
Flash Mode  
F
Yes  
Yes  
p.143  
p.68  
Depends on capture mode  
p.93  
p.118  
p.120  
p.122  
Drive Mode  
Single Frame Shooting  
Yes  
[A Rec. Mode] Menu  
Reset  
Setting  
Item  
Default Setting  
Page  
Exposure Mode  
Custom Image  
Scene Mode  
Digital Filter  
e
Bright  
Portrait  
No Filter  
Off  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
p.172  
p.155  
p.84  
10  
p.159  
HDR Capture  
HDR  
Capture  
Auto Align  
On  
p.149  
Exposure Bracket Value  
±2 EV  
JPEG  
File Format  
Image  
p.141  
p.141  
p.142  
p.142  
JPEG Recorded Pixels  
p
Capture  
Settings  
JPEG Quality  
Color Space  
C
sRGB  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
253  
Reset  
Setting  
Item  
Default Setting  
Page  
AE Metering  
Multi-segment  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
p.97  
AF.A  
Off  
Off  
p.103  
p.105  
Expanded Area AF  
AF  
Settings  
Auto  
(5 AF Points)  
AF Active Area  
Yes  
p.104  
p.103  
AF Assist Light  
Distortion Correction  
Lat-Chromatic-Ab Adj  
Number of Shots  
Auto EV Adjustment  
Interval  
On  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
On  
Lens  
Correction  
p.151  
p.127  
2 times  
Off  
Multi-  
exposure  
00:00'03"  
2 images  
Now  
Number of Shots  
Start Interval  
Interval  
Shooting  
p.124  
p.148  
Start Time  
12:00 AM/00:00  
Auto  
Highlight Correction  
Shadow Correction  
D-Range  
Settings  
Auto  
High-ISO NR  
Auto  
p.98  
Slow Shutter Speed NR  
X-Y direction  
Composition  
Rotation  
Adjust.  
Auto  
p.100  
Center  
±0°  
Yes  
p.153  
Recall Previous Position  
Off  
Shake Reduction  
Input Focal Length  
On  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
p.116  
p.262  
p.106  
p.109  
p.111  
35 mm  
Face Detection  
Off  
Contrast AF  
AF Autozoom  
Focus Peaking  
Off  
10  
Live View Grid Display  
Info Overlay  
Off  
On  
p.107  
Histogram Display  
Bright/Dark Area  
Off  
Off  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
254  
Reset  
Setting  
Item  
Default Setting  
Page  
p.212  
Display Time  
1sec.  
On  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Enlarge Instant Review  
Save RAW Data  
Histogram Display  
Bright/Dark Area  
Instant  
Review  
On  
Off  
Off  
Rb, Sc,  
e
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
|}e  
R
--, So  
--  
Rb, S--  
--  
,
K
b
|
,
|
E-Dial  
Programming  
R--, Sc,  
c
p.162  
|
--  
Rb, Sc,  
L/a  
p
|eLINE  
R--, Sc,  
|
--  
--, S--  
--  
R
,
C
|
One Push  
File Format  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
p.165  
p.167  
Button  
Customization  
(still pictures/movies)  
Enable AF1  
Digital Filter, HDR Capture,  
Shooting Info Display  
Off  
On  
p
Memory  
p.215  
Other than the above functions  
Action  
in B Mode  
Timed  
Exposure  
10  
Off  
5'00"  
On  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
ASTRO-  
TRACER  
Exposure Time  
GPS  
p.267  
GPS LED  
Indicators  
Calibration  
1min.  
On  
Positioning Interval  
GPS Time Sync  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes *1 p.168  
Save USER Mode  
*1 The saved settings are reset only with [Reset USER Mode] in the [Save USER Mode]  
screen.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
255  
[C Movie] Menu  
Item  
Reset  
Setting  
Default Setting  
Page  
p.129  
Exposure Setting  
Yes  
e
Recorded  
Pixels  
a
Yes  
Movie Capture  
Settings  
Framerate  
30 fps  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Quality Level  
C
3
Recording Sound Level  
Movie SR  
On  
Interval  
3sec.  
Recording  
Time  
00:00'12"  
Yes  
Interval Movie  
p.133  
Page  
Start Interval  
Start Time  
Now  
Yes  
Yes  
12:00 AM/00:00  
Playback Mode Palette  
Reset  
Setting  
Item  
Default Setting  
Image Rotation  
Digital Filter  
p.183  
p.189  
Monochrome  
Yes  
Maximum size  
according to the setting  
Resize  
p.187  
p.188  
Maximum size  
according to the setting  
Cropping  
Index  
No  
No  
Yes  
p.194  
p.220  
p.229  
p.182  
p.146  
p.158  
Protect  
10  
DPOF  
Slideshow  
Save as Manual WB  
Save Cross Processing  
Yes  
Recorded Pixels: p  
Quality Level: C  
RAW Development  
Yes  
p.196  
Movie Edit  
p.137  
p.227  
Eye-Fi Image Transfer  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
256  
[Q Playback] Menu  
Reset  
Setting  
Item  
Default Setting  
Page  
p.181  
Display Duration  
3sec.  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Slideshow  
Screen Effect  
Repeat Playback  
Quick Zoom  
p.176  
Bright/Dark Area  
Delete All Images  
[R Set-up] Menu  
Reset  
Setting  
Item  
Default Setting  
Page  
No  
No  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
p.58  
p.60  
Language/u  
Date Adjustment  
English  
01/01/2013  
Time Setting  
Hometown  
Destination (City)  
World Time Destination (DST)  
Hometown (City)  
Same as Hometown  
Same as Hometown  
According to initial setting  
According to initial setting  
According to initial setting  
p.207  
Hometown (DST)  
p.59  
Text Size  
Volume  
Sound  
3
Yes  
Yes  
p.206  
Effects  
Setting  
All on  
Guide Display  
Display Color  
On  
LCD Display  
p.210  
1
LCD Display Settings  
Flicker Reduction  
±0  
Yes  
No  
p.211  
p.27  
50 Hz  
10  
Video Out  
USB Connection  
According to initial setting  
No  
p.201  
p.233  
p.221  
p.222  
p.223  
Interface  
Options  
MSC  
Date  
Yes  
Yes  
Folder Name  
Create New Folder  
File Name  
IMGP  
No  
Embed Copyright  
Data  
Off  
No  
Copyright  
p.224  
Information Photographer  
No  
No  
Copyright Holder  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
257  
Reset  
Setting  
Item  
Default Setting  
Off  
Page  
p.226  
Eye-Fi  
Communication  
Yes  
Eye-Fi  
Communication Info  
Yes  
Yes  
Auto Power Off  
AA Battery Type  
Reset  
1min.  
p.214  
p.214  
p.217  
p.213  
Auto-detect  
Pixel Mapping  
Dust Removal  
Dust  
Removal  
p.264  
Startup Action/  
Shutdown Action  
Off  
Yes  
Sensor Cleaning  
Format  
p.265  
p.219  
p.218  
Firmware Info/Options  
[A Custom Setting] Menu  
Reset  
Setting  
Item  
Default Setting  
Page  
1. EV Steps  
1/3 EV Steps  
1 EV Step  
10sec.  
Off  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
p.92  
p.88  
p.97  
p.96  
p.97  
p.93  
p.95  
p.91  
p.145  
2. Sensitivity Steps  
3. Meter Operating Time  
4. AE-L with AF Locked  
5. Link AE and AF Point  
6. Bracketing Order  
Off  
0 – +  
7. One-Push Bracketing  
8. Bulb (B) Mode Options  
9. WB When Using Flash  
10. AWB in Tungsten Light  
11. Color Temperature Steps  
12. AF.S Setting  
Off  
Mode1  
10  
Auto White Balance  
Subtle Correction  
Kelvin  
Focus-priority  
Focus-priority  
Off  
p.147  
p.102  
p.103  
p.121  
p.71  
p.247  
13. AF.C Setting  
14. AF with Remote Control  
15. Release While Charging  
16. Flash in Wireless Mode  
Off  
On  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
258  
Reset  
Setting  
Item  
Default Setting  
Page  
17. Save Menu Location  
18. Catch-in Focus  
Reset Menu Location  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
p.213  
p.113  
p.112  
p.263  
p.217  
Off  
Off  
19. AF Fine Adjustment  
20. Using Aperture Ring  
Reset Custom Functions  
Disable  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
259  
Functions Available with Various  
Lens Combinations  
All camera capture modes are available when DA, DA L, or FA J lens is  
used, or when a lens with an s position is used with the aperture ring set  
to the s position.  
When they are used in a position other than s, or other lenses are used,  
the following restrictions apply.  
z: Functions are available when the aperture ring is set to the s  
position.  
#: Some functions are restricted.  
x: Functions are unavailable.  
DA  
DA L  
D FA  
FA J  
FA *6  
F *6  
A
M
P
Lens  
[Mount type]  
[KAF]  
[KAF]  
[KAF]  
[KA]  
[K]  
[KAF2]  
[KAF3]  
[KAF2]  
Function  
Autofocus  
(Lens only)  
z
z
z
#
#
(With AF adapter 1.7x) *1  
Manual focus  
(With the focus indicator)  
*2  
z
z
z
z
z
(With matte field)  
*4  
Quick-shift focus  
#
×
×
×
×
×
×
*8  
Focus point selection mode [Auto]  
AE Metering [Multi-segment]  
e/K/b/c/L mode  
a mode  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
×
z
z
z
z
z
#
z
z
z
z
*9  
#
#
×
10  
P-TTL auto flash *3  
Power zoom  
Automatically obtaining the lens focal  
length information  
z
z
z
×
×
×
×
*7  
Lens Correction  
z *5  
×
×
*1 Lenses with a maximum aperture of F2.8 or faster. Only available at the s position.  
*2 Lenses with a maximum aperture of F5.6 or faster.  
*3 Available when using the built-in flash, AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ, AF200FG or AF160FC.  
*4 Only available with compatible lenses.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
260  
*5 Distortion Correction is disabled when a DA FISH-EYE 10-17mm lens is used.  
*6 To use an FA SOFT 28mm F2.8 lens, FA SOFT 85mm F2.8 lens, or F SOFT 85mm F2.8  
lens, set [20. Using Aperture Ring] to [Enable] in the [A Custom Setting 3] menu.  
Pictures can be taken with the aperture you set, but only within manual aperture range.  
*7 Only available with an FA 31mm F1.8 Limited, FA 43mm F1.9 Limited, or FA 77mm F1.8  
Limited lens.  
*8 Fixed to [Spot].  
*9 c Automatic Exposure with the aperture open. (The aperture ring has no effect on the  
actual aperture value.)  
Lens names and mount names  
DA lenses with a motor and FA zoom lenses with power zoom use the KAF2  
mount. DA lenses with an ultrasonic motor and no AF coupler use the KAF3  
mount.  
FA single focal length lenses (non-zoom lenses), DA or DA L lenses without a  
motor, and D FA, FA J and F lenses use the KAF mount.  
Refer to respective lens manuals for details. Note that this camera is not  
equipped with a power zoom function.  
Lenses and accessories that cannot be used with  
this camera  
When the aperture ring is set to a position other than s or a lens without  
an s position or accessories such as an auto extension tube or auto  
bellows are used, the camera will not operate unless [20. Using Aperture  
Ring] is set to [Enable] in the [A Custom Setting 3] menu. Refer to “Using  
the Aperture Ring” (p.263) for details.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
261  
Lens and Built-in Flash  
Depending on the lens used with this camera, the use of the built-in flash  
may not be available or may be limited due to vignetting.  
The built-in flash cannot be regulated and fully discharges when A lenses  
not set to the s position, lenses manufactured prior to the A lenses or soft  
focus lenses are used.  
DA, DA L, D FA, FA J, and FA lenses not listed below can be used without  
problems.  
* The following lenses were evaluated without a hood.  
Unavailable due to vignetting  
Lens Name  
DA FISH-EYE 10-17mm F3.5-4.5 ED (IF)  
DA 12-24mm F4 ED AL  
DA 14mm F2.8 ED (IF)  
FAE 300mm F2.8 ED (IF)  
DAE 560mm F5.6 ED AW  
FAE 600mm F4 ED (IF)  
FAE 250-600mm F5.6 ED (IF)  
Available with some restrictions  
Lens Name  
Restrictions  
Vignetting may occur if the focal length is less  
than 20 mm.  
F FISH-EYE 17-28mm F3.5-4.5  
When the focal length is less than 28 mm, or  
when the focal length is 28 mm and the shooting  
distance is 1 m or less, vignetting may occur.  
DA 16-45mm F4 ED AL  
When the focal length is 20 mm or less or when  
the focal length is 35 mm and the shooting  
distance is less than 1.5 m, vignetting may occur.  
DAE 16-50mm F2.8 ED AL (IF)  
SDM  
10  
When the focal length is less than 24 mm or  
when the focal length is 35 mm and the shooting  
distance is 1 m or less, vignetting may occur.  
DA 17-70mm F4 AL (IF) SDM  
Vignetting may occur if the focal length is less  
than 35 mm.  
DA 18-250mm F3.5-6.3 ED AL (IF)  
DA 18-270mm F3.5-6.3 ED SDM  
FAE 28-70mm F2.8 AL  
Vignetting may occur if the focal length is less  
than 24mm.  
Vignetting may occur if the focal length is 28 mm  
and the shooting distance is less than 1 m.  
FA SOFT 28mm F2.8/  
FA SOFT 85mm F2.8  
Built-in flash always discharges fully.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
262  
Setting the Focal Length  
The Shake Reduction function operates by obtaining the lens information  
such as focal length. Set the focal length when using a lens for which the  
focal length information cannot be automatically obtained.  
1
Make sure that [Shake Reduction] is activated, and turn  
the camera off.  
Refer to “Reducing Vertical and Horizontal Camera Shake” (p.116) for  
details.  
2
3
Attach a lens, and turn the camera on.  
The [Input Focal Length] screen appears.  
Turn the rear e-dial (S) to set  
Input Focaal Length  
the focal length.  
Select from the following focal length  
values. (The default setting is 35 mm.)  
30  
40  
35  
8
10 12 15 18 20 24 28 30 35  
40 45 50 55 65 70 75 85 100 120  
135 150 180 200 250 300 350 400 450 500  
550 600 700 800  
Cancel  
OK OK  
MENU  
• If the focal length for your lens is not listed above, select the value closest to  
the actual focal length (example: [18] for 17 mm and [100] for 105 mm).  
• When using a zoom lens, select the actual focal length at the zoom setting  
being used in the same manner.  
10  
4
Press the 4 button.  
The camera is ready to take a picture.  
• To change the focal length setting, use [Input Focal Length] in the [A Rec.  
Mode 3] menu.  
• When using a lens without an s position or a lens with an s position with the  
aperture ring set to a position other than s, set [20. Using Aperture Ring] to  
[Enable] in the [A Custom Setting 3] menu. (p.263)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
263  
Using the Aperture Ring  
The shutter can be released even if the aperture ring of the D FA, FA, F or  
A lens is not set to the s position or a lens without an s position is  
attached.  
Select [Enable] in [20. Using Aperture Ring]  
Using Apertture Ring  
20.  
of the [A Custom Setting 3] menu.  
Disable  
Enable  
1
2
Shutteer willll releaase when  
aperturee ring iss not seett to the  
"A" possition  
Cancel  
OK OK  
MENU  
The following restrictions apply depending  
on the lens being used.  
Capture  
Lens Used  
Mode  
Restriction  
The aperture remains open regardless of  
the aperture ring position. The shutter  
speed changes in relation to the open  
aperture but an exposure deviation may  
occur. [F--] appears for the aperture  
indicator.  
D FA, FA, F, A, M (lens only  
or with automatic  
diaphragm accessories  
such as auto extension  
tube K)  
c
D FA, FA, F, A, M, S (with  
diaphragm accessories  
such as extension tube K)  
Pictures can be taken with a specified  
aperture value but an exposure  
deviation may occur. [F--] appears for  
the aperture indicator.  
c
c
Manualdiaphragmlenssuch  
as reflex lens (lens only)  
Pictures can be taken with a specified  
aperture value in the manual aperture  
range. [F--] appears for the aperture  
indicator.  
The exposure can be checked with  
Optical Preview.  
FA SOFT 28mm,  
FA SOFT 85mm,  
F SOFT 85mm  
(lens only)  
10  
c
a
Pictures can be taken with a set aperture  
value and shutter speed. [F--] appears  
for the aperture indicator.  
All lenses  
The exposure can be checked with  
Optical Preview.  
If the aperture ring is set to a position other than  
s, the camera operates in  
c
mode regardless of the mode dial setting except when set to  
a
or C mode.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
264  
Cleaning the CMOS Sensor  
If the CMOS sensor becomes dirty or dusty, shadows may appear in the  
image in certain situations such as when shooting against a white  
background. This indicates that the CMOS sensor must be cleaned.  
Removing Dust by Shaking the CMOS Sensor  
(Dust Removal)  
Shaking the CMOS sensor removes dust from the sensor unit.  
1
Select [Dust Removal] in the [R Set-up 4] menu, and press  
the four-way controller (5).  
The [Dust Removal] screen appears.  
2
Press the 4 button.  
Dust Removal  
Dust Removal  
Startup AAction  
Shutdownn Action  
The Dust Removal function is activated  
by shaking the CMOS sensor.  
To activate the Dust Removal function  
every time the camera is turned on and  
off, set [Startup Action] and [Shutdown  
OK Start  
MENU  
Action] to O.  
When Dust Removal is completed, the  
camera returns to the [R Set-up 4] menu.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
265  
Removing Dust with a Blower  
Raise the mirror up and open the shutter when cleaning the CMOS sensor  
with a blower.  
Please contact a PENTAX Service Center for professional cleaning as the  
CMOS sensor is a precision part. Cleaning services involve a fee.  
• The self-timer lamp blinks while cleaning the sensor.  
• This camera may generate a vibration sound while cleaning the CMOS  
sensor. It is not a malfunction.  
• You can use the optional imagesensor cleaning kit to clean the CMOS  
sensor.  
• Never use a spray blower or a blower with a brush. They may scratch the  
CMOS sensor. Also, do not wipe the CMOS sensor with a cloth.  
• Do not clean the sensor when the mode dial is set to p.  
• To prevent dirt and dust from accumulating on the CMOS sensor, keep the  
body mount cover on the camera when a lens is not attached.  
• When the battery level is low, [Not enough battery power remaining to clean  
sensor] is displayed on the monitor.  
• When cleaning the sensor, use the optional AC adapter kit or install a fully  
charged battery. If the battery capacity becomes low during cleaning, the self-  
timer lamp blinks rapidly. In this case, stop cleaning immediately.  
• Do not put the tip of the blower inside the lens mount area. If the power is  
turned off, this may cause damage to the shutter, CMOS sensor and the  
mirror.  
1
Turn the camera off, and remove the lens.  
Turn the camera on.  
2
3
10  
Select [Sensor Cleaning] in the [R Set-up 4] menu, and  
press the four-way controller (5).  
The [Sensor Cleaning] screen appears.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
266  
4
5
Press the four-way controller (2)  
to select [Mirror Up], and press  
the 4 button.  
Sensor Cleaning  
Raises mirror and opens shutter  
for acccess to cclean sseensor.  
Turn thhe powerr off too ffinish  
ġ
The mirror is locked in the up position.  
Mirror Up  
Cancel  
OK OK  
Clean the CMOS sensor.  
Use a brush-less blower to remove dirt  
and dust from the CMOS sensor.  
6
7
Turn the camera off.  
The mirror automatically returns to its original position.  
Attach the lens or body mount cover.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
267  
Using the GPS Unit  
The following functions are available when the optional GPS unit O-GPS1  
is attached to this camera.  
Displays the latitude,  
N
36°45..410'  
longitude, altitude of the  
current location, lens  
direction and  
W140°022.000'  
89m  
0°  
Electronic Compass  
Coordinated Universal  
Time (UTC) in standby  
mode.  
05/05/2013  
10:00:00  
Tracks and captures celestial bodies. By matching the  
movement of the camera’s built-in shake reduction unit  
with the movement of celestial bodies, celestial bodies  
can be captured as individual points even when shooting  
with a long exposure setting. (p.268)  
ASTROTRACER  
GPS Time Sync  
Automatically adjusts the camera’s date and time  
settings using information acquired from GPS satellites.  
• Refer to the manual of the GPS unit for details on how to attach the unit and  
information on the unit’s functions.  
• To display the electronic compass, press the M button twice in standby  
mode and select [Electronic Compass] from the standby mode display  
selection screen. (p.29)  
“Simple Navigation” cannot be used with this camera.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
268  
Shooting Celestial Bodies (ASTROTRACER)  
1
Select [GPS] in the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu, and press the  
four-way controller (5).  
The [GPS] screen appears.  
2
Select [ASTROTRACER], and  
press the four-way controller  
GPS  
ASTROTRACER  
(5).  
Calibration  
Posittioninng Intteerval  
GPS Timee Sync  
1min.  
The [ASTROTRACER] screen appears.  
MENU  
3
Select [Action in B Mode], press  
the four-way controller (5) to  
select V, and press the 4  
button.  
ASTROTRACER  
Action inn B Mode  
B
Enables ASTRROTRACER  
functiion in BBulb moode to  
eliminate sstar trrails dduring  
timed exposures at night  
The ASTROTRACER function is enabled  
when shooting in p mode.  
Cancel  
OK OK  
MENU  
To set [Exposure Time], first select the  
ON icon for the [Timed Exposure] item in  
ASTROTRACER submenu.  
4
Press the 3 button three times.  
The camera is ready to take a picture.  
10  
5
6
Set the mode dial to p.  
Press the shutter release button fully.  
Shooting starts.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
269  
7
Press the shutter release button fully again.  
Exposure ends.  
When [Timed Exposure] is enabled, shooting ends automatically after  
the set [Exposure Time] has elapsed.  
• When you do not want the indicators on the GPS unit to turn on while  
shooting with the ASTROTRACER function, you can turn them off by  
selecting the OFF icon for [GPS LED Indicators] in Step 3.  
• Refer to the manual of the GPS unit for details on ASTROTRACER.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
270  
Error Messages  
Error Messages  
Description  
The SD Memory Card is full and no more images  
can be saved. Insert a new SD Memory Card or  
delete unwanted files. (p.52, p.184)  
You may be able to save more images if you  
change the image capture settings. (p.140)  
Memory card full  
No image  
There are no images that can be played back on  
the SD Memory Card.  
You are trying to play back an image in a format  
not supported by this camera. You may be able  
computer.  
This image cannot be  
displayed  
camera. (p.52)  
No card in the camera  
No Eye-Fi card inserted  
Cannot use this card  
Images cannot be transferred when an Eye-Fi  
card is not inserted. (p.226)  
The inserted SD Memory Card is not compatible  
with this camera.  
There is a problem with the SD Memory Card and  
capturing, playing back and transferring images  
are not possible. Images on the card may be  
viewable on a computer but not with this camera.  
Memory card error  
The SD Memory Card you have inserted is  
unformatted or has been formatted on another  
device and is not compatible with this camera.  
Use the card after formatting it with this camera.  
(p.219)  
Card is not formatted  
The write-protect switch on an SD Memory Card  
you have inserted is locked. Unlock the SD  
Memory Card. (p.6)  
10  
Card is locked  
Data is protected by an SD Memory Card  
security feature.  
Card is electronically locked  
This image cannot be  
magnified  
You are trying to magnify an image that cannot  
be magnified.  
You are trying to delete an image that is  
protected. Remove the protection from the  
image. (p.220)  
This image is protected  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
271  
Error Messages  
Description  
Not enough battery  
power remaining to  
activate Pixel Mapping  
Appears during Pixel Mapping if the battery level  
is insufficient. Install a fully charged battery or  
use the optional AC adapter kit.  
Not enough battery  
power remaining to  
clean sensor  
Appears during sensor cleaning if the battery  
level is insufficient. Install a fully charged battery  
or use the optional AC adapter kit.  
Not enough battery  
power remaining to  
update the firmware  
Appears when trying to update the firmware if the  
battery level is insufficient. Install a fully charged  
battery or use the optional AC adapter kit.  
Unable to update firmware.  
There is a problem with the  
firmware update file  
Unable to update the firmware. The update file is  
damaged. Try downloading the update file again.  
The maximum folder number (999) and file  
number (9999) are being used, and no more  
images can be saved. Insert a new SD Memory  
Card or format the card. (p.219)  
Image folder cannot be  
created  
The image could not be saved because of an SD  
Memory Card error.  
Unable to store image  
Settings not stored  
The DPOF settings could not be saved because  
the SD Memory Card is full. Delete unwanted  
images and perform the DPOF setting again.  
(p.184)  
The camera was unable to measure the manual  
white balance (p.145) or use HDR Capture  
(p.149). Try the operation again.  
The operation could not be  
completed correctly  
You cannot select more than the maximum  
number of images for Select & Delete (p.184),  
Index (p.194), and Eye-Fi Image Transfer  
(p.227).  
No more images  
can be selected  
There are no images that can be transferred in  
the selected folder. (p.227)  
Image not found  
10  
There are no images that can be processed  
No image can be processed using the Digital Filter (p.189) or RAW  
Development (p.196) function.  
Appears when you try to perform Resize (p.187),  
Cropping (p.188), Digital Filter (p.189), or RAW  
This image cannot be  
Development (p.196) for images captured with  
processed  
other cameras, or when you try to perform Resize  
or Cropping for minimum file size images.  
The camera failed  
The creation of an index image failed. (p.194)  
to create an image  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
272  
Error Messages  
Description  
This function is not available You are trying to set a function that is not  
in the current mode  
available in n, H or C mode.  
Camera overheated.  
Disabling Live View  
temporarily  
Live View cannot be used because the camera’s  
internal temperature is too high. Try using Live  
View again when the camera has cooled down.  
to protect circuitry  
The camera will turn off because its internal  
temperature gets too hot. Leave the camera  
turned off and give it enough time to cool down.  
Turn it on again after a while.  
The camera will turn off  
to prevent damage from  
overheating  
Images cannot be transferred when [Eye-Fi  
Communication] is not set to [SELECT] in [Eye-  
Fi] of the [R Set-up 2] menu. (p.226)  
Set the Eye-Fi communication  
to "SELECT"  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
273  
Troubleshooting  
In rare cases, the camera may not operate correctly due to static  
electricity. This can be remedied by taking the battery out and putting it  
back in again. After these procedures are done, if the camera operates  
correctly, it does not require any repairs.  
We recommend checking the following items before contacting a service  
center.  
Problem  
Cause  
Remedy  
Battery is not  
installed  
Check if a battery is installed.  
The camera  
does not turn  
on  
Check the orientation of battery. Re-insert  
battery according to the +/- symbols.  
(p.47, p.48)  
Battery is not  
installed properly  
The battery power Replace with a charged battery or use the  
is low optional AC adapter kit.  
The built-in flash is E blinks while the built-in flash is  
charging  
charging. Wait until charging is finished.  
There is no  
Insert an SD Memory Card with available  
space or delete unwanted images. (p.73,  
p.184)  
available space on  
the SD Memory  
Card  
The shutter  
cannot be  
released  
Recording  
Wait until recording is finished.  
The lens aperture  
ring is set to a  
Set the lens aperture ring to the s  
position or select [Enable] in [20. Using  
position other than Aperture Ring] of the [A Custom Setting  
s
3] menu. (p.263)  
Autofocus cannot work well for subjects  
that have low contrast (sky, white walls,  
etc.), dark colors, intricate designs,  
rapidly-moving objects or scenery shot  
through a window or a net-like pattern.  
10  
Autofocusdoes The subject is  
not work  
difficult to focus on Lock focus on another object located at  
the same distance as your subject, then  
aim at the target and press the shutter  
release button fully. Alternatively, use  
manual focus. (p.110)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
274  
Problem  
Cause  
Remedy  
Position the subject in the AF area. If the  
subject is outside the AF area, aim the  
camera at the subject and lock the focus,  
then compose a picture and press the  
shutter release button fully.  
The subject is not in  
the AF area  
Autofocusdoes  
not work  
The subject is too  
close  
Move away from the subject and take a  
picture.  
The focus mode is Set the focus mode switch to l or A.  
set to \  
(p.101)  
The AE Lock  
function does  
not operate  
p mode is set  
AE Lock is not available in p mode.  
When the flash  
mode is set to C or  
Set the flash mode to E (Flash On) or F  
(Flash On+Red-eye Reduction). (p.68)  
, the flash will  
C
The built-in  
flash does not  
discharge  
not discharge if the  
subject is bright  
K, d, A, Z,  
y, U, n, or E of  
H mode is set  
Select a capture mode other than those  
shown to the left. (p.82)  
The power  
zoom system  
The camera does  
not have a power  
Use manual zoom.  
does not work zoom function  
The USB  
connectionwith The USB  
Set [USB Connection] to [MSC] in  
a computer  
connection mode is [Interface Options] of the [R Set-up 2]  
does not work set to [PTP]  
properly  
menu. (p.233)  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
275  
Problem  
Cause  
The Shake  
Reduction function  
is off  
Remedy  
Turn the Shake Reduction function on.  
(p.116)  
If a lens for which the focal length  
The focal length is information cannot be obtained is used,  
not set  
set the focal length in the [Input Focal  
Length] screen. (p.262)  
Shake  
Reductiondoes  
not work  
Shutter speed is too  
low for the Shake  
Reduction function Turn off the Shake Reduction function  
to be effective when and use a tripod.  
panning or shooting  
night scenes, etc.  
Move away from the subject, or turn off  
tripod.  
The subject is too  
close  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
276  
Main Specifications  
Model Description  
TTL autofocus, auto-exposure SLR digital camera with a built-in  
retractable P-TTL flash  
Type  
PENTAX KAF2 bayonet mount (AF coupler, lens information  
contacts, K-mount with power contacts)  
Lens Mount  
Compatible Lens KAF3, KAF2 (power zoom not compatible), KAF, KA mount lenses  
Image Capture Unit  
Image Sensor  
Primary color filter, CMOS, Size: 23.7 × 15.7 (mm)  
Effective Pixels Approx. 16.28 megapixels  
Total Pixels  
Dust Removal  
Sensitivity  
Approx. 16.49 megapixels  
SP coating and CMOS sensor operations  
ISO AUTO: 100 to 51200 (EV steps can be set to 1 EV, 1/2 EV, or  
(Standard Output) 1/3 EV)  
Image Stabilizer Sensor-shift Shake Reduction  
File Formats  
Recording Formats RAW (DNG), JPEG (Exif 2.3), DCF2.0 compliant  
JPEG: p (4928×3264)  
a (3456×2304)  
RAW: p (4928×3264)  
E (4224×2816)  
f (2688×1792)  
Recorded Pixels  
Quality Level  
RAW (12bit): DNG  
JPEG: C (Best), D (Better), E (Good)  
RAW and JPEG simultaneously recordable  
Color Space  
sRGB, AdobeRGB  
SD Memory Cards, SDHC Memory Cards, SDXC Memory Cards  
and Eye-Fi Cards  
Storage Media  
10  
Date (100_1018, 100_1019...)/  
Storage Folder  
PENTX (100PENTX, 101PENTX...); “PENTX” can be changed by  
user  
Viewfinder  
Type  
Pentaprism Finder  
Coverage (FOV) Approx. 100%  
Magnification  
Approx. 0.92× (50 mm F1.4 at infinity)  
Eye-Relief  
Length  
Approx. 21.7 mm (from the view window), Approx. 24.5 mm (from  
the center of lens)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
277  
Diopter Adjustment Approx. -2.5 to +1.5 m-1  
Focusing Screen Interchangeable Natural-Bright-Matte III focusing screen  
Live View  
Type  
TTL method using CMOS image sensor  
Focusing  
Mechanism  
Contrast detection: Face Detection, Tracking, Select, Spot  
Field of view: approx. 100%, Magnified view (2×, 4×, 6×), Grid  
Display (4 × 4 Grid, Golden Section, Scale), Bright/Dark Area  
warning, Histogram, Focus Peaking  
Display  
LCD Monitor  
Type  
TFT color LCD monitor, wide angle viewing  
3.0 inches  
Size  
Dots  
Approx. 921,000 dots  
Adjustment  
Brightness and colors adjustable  
White Balance  
Method using a combination of the CMOS sensor and the light-  
source detection sensor  
Auto  
Daylight, Shade, Cloudy, Fluorescent Light (D: Daylight Color, N:  
Daylight White, W: Cool White, L: Warm White), Tungsten, Flash,  
f, Manual, Color Temperature  
Preset Modes  
Manual  
Configuration on monitor (up to 3 settings can be saved),  
Color Temperature settings,  
Copying the white balance settings of a captured image  
Fine Adjustment Adjustable ±7 steps on A-B axis and G-M axis  
Focusing System  
Type  
TTL: phase-matching autofocus  
Focus Sensor  
SAFOX IXi+, 11 points (9 cross type focus points in the center)  
10  
Brightness Range EV -1 to 18 (ISO 100)  
AF Single (l): Focus priority or shutter priority mode  
AF Modes  
AF Continuous (k): Focus priority or FPS priority mode  
AF Auto (f): Automatically switches between l and k.  
Focus Point  
Auto (5 AF Points), Auto (11 AF Points), Select (Expanded Area AF  
Selection Modes is available), Spot  
AF Assist Light  
Dedicated LED AF assist light  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
278  
Exposure Control  
TTL open-aperture 77 segment metering  
Metering Modes: Multi-segment metering, Center-weighted  
metering, Spot metering  
Type  
Metering Range EV 0 to 22 (ISO100 at 50mm F1.4)  
Auto Picture (n), Scene (H), Program (e), Sensitivity  
Priority (K), Shutter Priority (b), Aperture Priority (c), Shutter &  
Aperture Priority (L), Manual (a), Bulb (p)  
Auto Picture modes: automatically selects from Standard, Portrait,  
Landscape, Macro, Moving Object, Night Scene Portrait, Night  
Exposure Modes Scene, Blue Sky, Forest  
Scene modes: Portrait, Landscape, Macro, Moving Object, Night  
Scene Portrait, Sunset, Blue Sky, Forest, Night Scene, Night Scene  
HDR, Night Snap, Food, Pet, Kids, Surf & Snow, Backlight  
Silhouette, Candlelight, Stage Lighting, Museum  
* Fixed to JPEG in Night Scene HDR mode.  
EV Compensation ±5 EV (1/3 EV steps or 1/2 EV steps can be selected)  
AE Lock  
Can be assigned to the =/L button from the menu.  
Shutter  
Type  
Electronically controlled vertical-run focal plane shutter  
Auto: 1/6000 to 30 seconds, Manual: 1/6000 to 30 seconds (1/3 EV  
steps or 1/2 EV steps), Bulb  
Shutter Speed  
Drive Mode  
Single frame, Continuous (Hi, Lo), Self-timer (12 sec., 2 sec.),  
Remote Control (0 sec., 3 sec.), Exposure Bracketing (3 frames)  
Mode Selection  
Approx. 6 fps* (JPEG, Continuous Hi)  
Approx. 3 fps* (JPEG, Continuous Lo)  
* When the camera is used with the rechargeable lithium-ion  
battery D-LI109.  
Continuous FPS  
Built-in Flash  
10  
Built-in retractable P-TTL pop-up flash  
Type  
Guide number: approx. 12 (ISO100/m)  
Angle of view coverage: equivalent to 28 mm in 35 mm format  
P-TTL, Red-eye Reduction, Slow-speed Sync, Trailing Curtain Sync;  
High-speed Sync and Wireless Sync are also available with a  
PENTAX dedicated external flash.  
Flash Modes  
Sync Speed  
1/180 sec.  
Flash Exposure  
Compensation  
-2.0 to +1.0 EV  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
279  
Capture Functions  
Bright, Natural, Portrait, Landscape, Vibrant, Radiant, Muted,  
Bleach Bypass, Reversal Film, Monochrome, Cross Processing  
Custom Image  
Noise Reduction High-ISO NR, Slow Shutter Speed NR  
Dynamic Range  
Highlight Correction, Shadow Correction  
Settings  
Lens Correction Distortion Correction, Lateral Chromatic Aberration Correction  
Digital Filter  
Extract Color, Toy Camera, Retro, High Contrast, Shading, Invert Color, Color  
Auto, HDR 1, HDR 2, HDR 3  
HDR Capture  
Auto Align (automatic composition correction)  
Exposure Bracket Value: ±1 EV, ±2 EV, ±3 EV  
Multi-exposure  
Number of shots: 2-9, Exposure adjusted automatically.  
Shooting interval: 3 sec. to 24 hr.; Start Interval setting:  
immediately, from the set time; Number of shots: up to 999 images  
Interval Shooting  
Composition  
Adjustment  
Adjustment range of ±1.0 mm (when rotated: ±0.5 mm) up, down,  
left or right; rotating range of ±1 degree  
Movie  
File Format  
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264  
a (1920×1080, K, 30 fps/25 fps/24 fps),  
Recorded Pixels b (1280×720, K, 60 fps/50 fps/30 fps/25 fps/24 fps),  
c (640×480, I, 30 fps/25 fps/24 fps)  
Quality Level  
Sound  
C (Best), D (Better), E (Good)  
Built-in monaural microphone; recording sound level can be  
adjusted.  
Up to 25 minutes; automatically stops recording if the internal  
temperature of the camera becomes high.  
Recording Time  
Bright, Natural, Portrait, Landscape, Vibrant, Radiant, Muted,  
Bleach Bypass, Reversal Film, Monochrome, Cross Processing  
Custom Image  
Digital Filter  
Extract Color, Toy Camera, Retro, High Contrast, Invert Color, Color  
Recording interval: 3 sec., 5 sec., 10 sec., 30 sec., 1 min., 5 min.,  
10 min., 30 min., 1 hr.; Recording time: 4 sec. to 99 hr.; Start  
Interval setting: immediately, from the set time  
10  
Interval Movie  
* The file format is Motion JPEG (AVI).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
280  
Playback Functions  
Single frame, multi-image display (4, 9, 16, 36, and 81 thumbnails),  
display magnification (up to 16×, scrollable, quick zoom), image  
rotation, histogram display (Y histogram, RGB histogram), bright/  
dark area warning, detailed information display, copyright  
information display (photographer, copyright holder), GPS data  
(latitude, longitude, altitude, direction, Coordinated Universal Time  
(UTC)), folder display, calendar filmstrip display, slideshow,  
wireless image transfer with Eye-Fi  
Playback View  
Single image, all images, select & delete, folder, instant review  
image  
Delete  
Monochrome, Extract Color, Toy Camera, Retro, High Contrast,  
Shading, Invert Color, Color, Tone Expansion, Sketch, Water Color,  
Pastel, Posterization, Miniature, Soft, Starburst, Fish-eye, Slim,  
Base Parameter Adj  
Digital Filter  
File Format (JPEG), Image Capture Settings (Aspect Ratio,  
Recorded Pixels, Quality Level, Color Space), Lens Correction  
(Distortion Correction, Lateral Chromatic Aberration Correction),  
Custom Image, White Balance, Sensitivity, High-ISO NR, Shadow  
Correction  
RAW  
Development  
Resize, Cropping (aspect ratio can be changed and tilt correction is  
available), Index, Movie Edit (divide or delete selected frames),  
Capturing a JPEG still picture from a movie, Save RAW data (if  
JPEG data is available in buffer memory)  
Edit  
Customization  
USER Mode  
Up to 2 user-defined settings can be saved.  
Custom  
Functions  
20 items  
Mode Memory  
12 items  
E-Dial  
Programming  
Electronic dials (front/rear): customizable to each exposure mode.  
|/Y button: One Push File Format, Exposure Bracketing,  
Optical Preview, Digital Preview, Composition Adjustment, AF  
Active Area  
Button  
Customization  
10  
=/L button: Enable AF1, Enable AF2, Cancel AF, AE Lock  
Text Size  
Standard, Large  
World Time  
World Time settings for 75 cities (28 time zones)  
AF Fine  
Adjustment  
±10 steps, adjustment for all lenses or individual lenses (up to 20  
can be saved)  
Copyright  
Information  
Names of “Photographer” and “Copyright Holder” are embedded to  
the image file.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
281  
Power Supply  
Battery Type  
AC Adapter  
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery D-LI109 or  
AA battery holder D-BH109 with four AA batteries (lithium, Ni-MH  
rechargeable, alkaline)  
* Either one of these is provided with the camera. The provided  
power supply varies depending on the country or region where the  
camera was purchased. The item not provided with the camera is  
optionally available.  
AC Adapter kit K-AC128 (optional)  
<With D-LI109>  
Number of recordable images (with 50% flash usage): approx. 410 images,  
(without flash usage): approx. 480 images  
Playback time: approx. 270 minutes  
<With AA battery holder D-BH109 with four AA lithium batteries>  
Number of recordable images (with 50% flash usage): approx.710  
images, (without flash usage): approx. 1250 images  
Playback time: approx.560 minutes  
Battery Life  
*
Tested in compliance with CIPA standard using a new  
rechargeable lithium-ion battery/new AA lithium batteries  
under the temperature at 23°C. Actual results may vary  
depending on the shooting conditions/circumstances.  
Interfaces  
USB 2.0 (high-speed compatible), AV output terminal, Cable  
release terminal  
Connection Port  
USB Connection MSC/PTP  
Video Output  
NTSC/PAL  
Format  
Dimensions and Weight  
Approx. 129.0 mm (W) × 96.5 mm (H) × 70.0 mm (D) (excluding the  
hot shoe, operation parts and other protrusions)  
Dimensions  
Approx. 650g (loaded and ready with the dedicated rechargeable  
lithium-ion battery and SD Memory Card); Approx. 675g (loaded  
and ready with four AA lithium batteries and SD Memory Card);  
Approx. 590 g (body only)  
10  
Weight  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
282  
Accessories  
USB Cable I-USB7, Strap O-ST132, Rechargeable Lithium-ion  
Battery D-LI109*, Battery Charger D-BC109*, AC plug cord*,  
Software (CD-ROM) S-SW133  
Package  
Contents  
* Depending on the country and region where the camera was  
purchased, these items are replaced with the AA Battery Holder  
D-BH109 and AA lithium batteries.  
<Mounted on the camera>  
Eyecup FR, Hot shoe cover FK, Body mount cover  
Software  
SILKYPIX Developer Studio 3.0 LE  
Approximate Image Storage Capacity and Playback Time  
When using the fully charged battery or new AA batteries  
Flash Photography  
Normal  
Shooting  
Playback  
Time  
Battery  
Temperature  
50% Use 100% Use  
23°C  
0°C  
480  
360  
410  
300  
710  
360  
250  
500  
270 minutes  
210 minutes  
560 minutes  
D-LI109  
*1  
AA lithium batteries  
23°C  
1250  
AA Ni-MH  
rechargeable  
batteries (1900mAh)  
23°C  
23°C  
580  
170  
380  
100  
290  
70  
300 minutes  
AA alkaline batteries  
240 minutes  
The image storage capacity (normal recording and flash use 50%) is based on  
measuring conditions in accordance with CIPA standards, while other data is based  
on our measuring conditions. Some deviation from the above figures may occur in  
actual use depending on the selected capture mode and shooting conditions.  
*1 Tested using the Energizer Ultimate Lithium Batteries.  
Approximate Image Storage Capacity by Size  
10  
When using a 2 GB SD Memory Card  
JPEG Quality  
Recorded Pixels  
RAW  
C
214  
D
379  
E
p (4928×3264)  
E (4224×2816)  
a (3456×2304)  
f (2688×1792)  
749  
76  
289  
512  
1007  
1463  
2363  
429  
758  
706  
1229  
The number of storable images may vary depending on the subject, shooting  
conditions, selected capture mode and SD Memory Card, etc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
283  
Index  
Accessories ............................18  
Adding the date (DPOF) .......230  
AdobeRGB ...........................142  
AE Lock ..................................96  
AE Metering ............................97  
AF coupler ..............................19  
AF Fine Adjustment ..............112  
AF frame ...........................65, 67  
k .....................................103  
l .....................................102  
=/L button ....21, 101, 167  
Alkaline batteries ....................48  
Aperture Priority Automatic  
Exposure mode c .................89  
Aspect Ratio .................130, 188  
.........................................64, 83  
Auto Flash Discharge .............68  
Symbols  
[A Rec. Mode] menu .... 77, 252  
[C Movie] menu .... 79, 129, 255  
[Q Playback] menu .... 175, 256  
[R Set-up] menu ......... 204, 256  
[A Custom Setting] menu  
....................................... 80, 257  
Q (Playback) button  
................................... 21, 23, 72  
d (Green) button ................... 20  
E (Flash pop-up) button ... 21, 71  
m (EV Compensation) button  
................................... 20, 23, 92  
U Standard ........................... 83  
c Portrait ........................ 83, 84  
s Landscape .................. 83, 84  
b Macro .......................... 83, 84  
\ Moving Object ............. 83, 84  
. Night Scene Portrait ... 83, 84  
K Sunset ....................... 83, 84  
d Blue Sky .................... 83, 84  
x Forest ......................... 83, 84  
A Night Scene ...................... 84  
Z Night Scene HDR ............ 84  
l Night Snap ........................ 84  
K Food .................................. 84  
Z Pet .................................... 84  
R Kids .................................... 84  
Q Surf & Snow ..................... 84  
y Backlight Silhouette ......... 84  
U Candlelight ........................ 85  
n Stage Lighting .................. 85  
E Museum ........................... 85  
C Movie .............................. 131  
Auto Power Off .....................214  
c (Aperture Priority Automatic  
Exposure) mode .....................89  
AV device .............................200  
10  
B
p (Bulb Exposure) mode .......91  
Backlight Silhouette y ..........84  
Base Parameter Adj (Digital  
Filter) ....................................190  
Battery ....................................45  
Battery type ..........................214  
A
AA batteries ........................... 48  
AC adapter ............................. 50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
284  
Bleach Bypass (Custom Image)  
............................................. 155  
Blue Sky d .................... 83, 84  
Body mount cover .................. 54  
Bracketing shooting ............... 93  
Bright (Custom Image) ......... 155  
Bright areas ........................... 34  
Bright/Dark Area warning  
..................................... 176, 212  
Brightness adjustment ......... 148  
Built-in flash ........................... 68  
Bulb shooting ......................... 91  
Button Customization ........... 162  
Contrast AF ..........................106  
Contrast Control Sync ..........250  
Contrast detection AF ...........101  
Control panel ....................28, 38  
Copyright Holder ..................224  
Correcting distortion .............151  
Creating new folders ............222  
Cropping images ..................188  
Image) ..................................155  
f (White Balance) ...........143  
Custom Image ......................155  
[A Custom Setting] menu  
C
D
Cable release terminal ........... 19  
Calendar Filmstrip Display ... 179  
Camera shake ............. 116, 130  
Candlelight U ........................ 85  
Capture mode ........................ 82  
Card access lamp .................. 19  
Catch-in Focus ..................... 113  
CD-ROM .............................. 235  
Center-weighted metering ..... 97  
Charging the battery .............. 45  
City ....................................... 209  
Cleaning the sensor ............. 264  
Cloudy (White Balance) ....... 143  
Color (Digital Filter) ...... 159, 189  
Color Space ......................... 142  
Color Temperature (White  
Dark areas ..............................34  
Date Adjustment .....................60  
Daylight (White Balance) ......143  
Default settings .....................252  
U/i (Delete) button .......23, 73  
Deleting ..........................73, 184  
Deleting all images ...............186  
Destination ...........................207  
Detailed Information Display  
...............................................31  
Developing RAW images  
Digital Filter ..................159, 189  
Digital Preview ......................115  
Diopter adjustment .................56  
Diopter adjustment lever  
.........................................19, 56  
Direct keys ................37, 76, 252  
Display Color ........................210  
Display language ....................58  
Distortion ..............................151  
DNG .....................................141  
DPOF ...................................229  
D-Range Settings .................149  
10  
Balance) ............................... 147  
Composition Adjustment ...... 153  
Compression ratio ................ 142  
Computer ............................. 231  
Connection cable cover ... 19, 50  
Continuous mode k  
............................................. 103  
Continuous playback ........... 181  
Continuous Shooting ........... 122  
Contrast (Custom Image) .... 157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
285  
Drive Mode ............................ 76  
DST ................................ 59, 207  
Dust Removal ...................... 264  
Dynamic Range ................... 148  
Firmware Info/Options ..........218  
Fish-eye (Digital Filter) .........190  
Flash ...............................68, 239  
Flash (White Balance) ..........143  
Flash Exposure Compensation  
...............................................70  
Flash On .................................68  
E (Flash pop-up) button ...21, 71  
Fluorescent Light (White  
Balance) ...............................143  
Focus indicator .......................65  
Focus lock ..............................65  
Focus Peaking ......................111  
Focusing ...............................101  
Focusing point ......................104  
Focusing ring ........................110  
Focus-priority ................102, 103  
Folder Display ......................178  
Folder Name .........................221  
Format ..................................219  
Four-way controller (2345)  
.............................22, 23, 37, 76  
Framerate .............................130  
Front e-dial (R) ............21, 23  
E
E-dial .................................... 162  
E-Dial Programming ............ 162  
Electronic Compass ....... 29, 267  
Enlarge Instant Review ........ 212  
Error messages ................... 270  
EV Compensation .................. 92  
m (EV Compensation) button  
................................... 20, 23, 92  
Exif ....................................... 224  
Expanded Area AF .............. 105  
Exposure ................................ 87  
Exposure Bracket Value ...... 150  
Exposure Bracketing .............. 93  
Exposure modes .............. 86, 89  
Exposure setting for movies  
............................................. 129  
External flash ....................... 243  
Extract Color (Digital Filter)  
..................................... 159, 189  
Eyecup ................................... 56  
Eye-Fi card .......................... 226  
Eye-Fi Image Transfer ......... 227  
F
Face Detection (Contrast AF)  
............................................. 106  
File Format ........................... 141  
File Name ............................ 223  
File naming system .............. 142  
File number .................. 216, 224  
Filter ..................................... 159  
Filter Effect (Custom Image)  
............................................. 157  
Fine Sharpness (Custom Image)  
............................................. 157  
Firmware .............................. 218  
10  
G
GPS ......................................267  
GPS Time Sync ....................267  
Green Button ..................20, 162  
Guide Display .........83, 162, 210  
Guide indicators .....................34  
Guide number .......................242  
H
HDR Capture ........................149  
High Contrast (Digital Filter)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
286  
..................................... 159, 189  
High Dynamic Range Image  
K
Kelvin ....................................147  
Kids R ....................................84  
Capture ................................ 149  
High/Low Key Adjustment  
L
(Custom Image) ................... 157  
High-ISO NR .......................... 98  
Highlight Correction ............. 148  
High-speed Sync ................. 245  
Histogram Display  
................................. 30, 33, 212  
Hometown ............................ 207  
Hot shoe ................................ 19  
Hue (Custom Image) ........... 157  
Landscape s ...................83, 84  
Landscape (Custom Image)  
.............................................155  
Language setting ....................58  
Language/u .......................58  
Lateral chromatic aberration  
.............................................151  
LCD color tuning ...................211  
LCD Display Settings ...........211  
LCD Monitor ...........................24  
Lens ................................54, 259  
Lens Correction ....................151  
Lens information contacts ......19  
Lens mount cover ...................54  
Lens mount index .............19, 55  
Lens unlock button ...........21, 55  
Lithium batteries .....................48  
Live View ..........................26, 67  
Locking the exposure .............96  
Long exposure ........................91  
U/i (Live View/Delete) button  
I
Image Capture Settings ....... 140  
Image finishing tone ............. 155  
Image plane indicator ............ 19  
Image Rotation .................... 183  
Image storage capacity  
............................................. 282  
Index image ......................... 194  
M button  
..................... 21, 23, 24, 30, 179  
Info Overlay ......................... 107  
Initial settings ......................... 58  
Initializing a memory card .... 219  
Input Focal Length ............... 262  
Installing software ................ 235  
Instant Review ............... 66, 212  
Interface Options ......... 201, 233  
Interval Movie ...................... 133  
Interval Shooting .................. 124  
Invert Color (Digital Filter)  
M
10  
a (Manual Exposure) mode ...89  
Macintosh .............................232  
Macro b ...........................83, 84  
Magnifying images .......109, 177  
Main switch .................20, 23, 57  
Manual Exposure mode a .....89  
Manual focus \ .................110  
Manual White Balance .........145  
Matte field .............................110  
Memory ................................215  
..................................... 159, 189  
ISO sensitivity ........................ 87  
J
JPEG ................................... 141  
JPEG Quality ....................... 142  
JPEG Recorded Pixels ........ 141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
287  
Memory card .......................... 52  
3 button ............ 22, 23, 39  
Menu display ........................ 213  
Menu operation ...................... 39  
Meter operating time .............. 97  
\ (Manual focus) .............. 110  
Microphones .......................... 19  
Miniature (Digital Filter) ........ 190  
Mired .................................... 147  
Mirror ..................................... 19  
Mode dial ......................... 21, 82  
Monitor ................................. 211  
Monitor display ....................... 24  
Monochrome (Custom Image)  
............................................. 155  
Monochrome (Digital Filter)  
............................................. 189  
Movie ................................... 129  
Movie Capture Settings ....... 129  
Movie Edit ............................ 137  
[C Movie] menu .... 79, 129, 255  
Movie SR ............................. 130  
Moving Object \ ............. 83, 84  
MSC ..................................... 233  
Multi-exposure ..................... 127  
Multiple flash shooting ......... 249  
Multi-segment metering ......... 97  
Muted (Custom Image) ........ 155  
O
4 button ................21, 23, 105  
One-Push Bracketing .............95  
One Push File Format ..........166  
Optical Preview ....................114  
Output format .......................201  
P
e (Program Automatic  
Exposure) mode .....................89  
PAL .......................................201  
Pastel (Digital Filter) .............190  
Pet Z .....................................84  
Pixel Mapping .......................213  
Pixels ............................130, 141  
Playback .................................72  
Q (Playback) button  
...................................21, 23, 72  
Playback Info Display .............30  
[Q Playback] menu .....175, 256  
Playback mode palette  
.....................................174, 255  
Playback time .......................282  
Playing back movies .............135  
Portrait c .........................83, 84  
Portrait (Custom Image) .......155  
Posterization (Digital Filter)  
Power .....................................57  
Preview .................................114  
Printing .................................229  
Program Automatic Exposure  
mode e ..................................89  
Protect ..................................220  
Provided software .................235  
PTP ......................................233  
P-TTL ...................................244  
N
10  
Natural (Custom Image) ...... 155  
Night Scene A ...................... 84  
Night Scene HDR Z ............ 84  
Night Scene Portrait . ... 83, 84  
Night Snap l ........................ 84  
Ni-MH rechargeable batteries  
............................................... 48  
Noise Reduction .................... 98  
NTSC ................................... 201  
Q
Quality Level .................130, 142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
288  
Quick Zoom ......................... 176  
...............................................89  
Sensor Cleaning ...................265  
[R Set-up] menu ..........204, 256  
Shade (White Balance) ........143  
Shading (Digital Filter)  
.....................................159, 189  
Shadow Correction ...............148  
Shake Reduction ..................116  
.............................................157  
Shooting celestial bodies ......268  
Shooting Info Display .............29  
Shooting information ..............24  
R
Radiant (Custom Image) ...... 155  
RAW .................................... 141  
RAW Development ...... 196, 235  
V/Y button .............. 21, 165  
Rear e-dial (S) ............ 21, 23  
[A Rec. Mode] menu .... 77, 252  
Recorded Pixels ........... 130, 141  
Recording Sound Level ....... 130  
Red-eye reduction ................. 68  
Release .................................. 66  
Release-priority .................... 102  
Remote Control .................... 120  
Remote control receiver  
Automatic Exposure L .......89  
Shutter Priority Automatic  
....................................... 19, 121  
Reset ................................... 217  
Resize .................................. 187  
Retro (Digital Filter) ...... 159, 189  
Reversal Film (Custom Image)  
............................................. 155  
RGB Histogram Display ... 30, 33  
Rotation ............................... 183  
Exposure mode b .................89  
Shutter release button  
...................................20, 23, 65  
SILKYPIX Developer Studio  
.............................................235  
Single image display ........30, 72  
Single mode l ................102  
Sketch (Digital Filter) ............189  
Slideshow .............................181  
Slim (Digital Filter) ................190  
Slow Shutter Speed NR .......100  
Software .......................218, 235  
Sound Effects .......................206  
Speaker ..................................19  
Specifications .......................276  
Spot (Contrast AF) ...............106  
Spot metering .........................97  
sRGB ....................................142  
Stage Lighting n ...................85  
Standard U ............................83  
Standard Information Display  
...............................................30  
Standby mode ........................24  
S
Saturation (Custom Image)  
............................................. 157  
Save as Manual WB ............ 146  
Save Cross Processing ....... 158  
Save RAW Data ............. 72, 212  
Save Settings ....................... 168  
Scene mode H ................... 84  
SD Memory Card ........... 52, 219  
Select (Contrast AF)  
10  
............................................. 106  
Select & Delete .................... 184  
Self-timer ............................. 118  
Self-timer lamp ............... 19, 119  
Sensitivity ....................... 87, 197  
Sensitivity Priority (Automatic  
Exposure) mode K  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
289  
Starburst (Digital Filter) ........ 190  
Status screen ......................... 25  
Strap ...................................... 44  
Sunset K ....................... 83, 84  
Surf & Snow Q ..................... 84  
K (Sensitivity Priority Automatic  
Exposure) mode  
Viewfinder .........................35, 56  
Volume .........................130, 206  
W
Water Color (Digital Filter)  
.............................................189  
White Balance ......................143  
Windows ...............................232  
Wireless Mode ................68, 246  
World Time ...........................207  
Write-protect .............................6  
............................................... 89  
T
L (Shutter & Aperture Priority  
Automatic Exposure) ............. 89  
Temperature warning ............. 27  
Terminal cover ....................... 19  
Thumbnail display ................ 179  
Tone Expansion (Digital Filter)  
............................................. 189  
Toning (Custom Image) ....... 157  
Toy Camera (Digital Filter)  
Z
Zoom lens ...............................65  
..................................... 159, 189  
Tracking (Contrast AF)  
............................................. 106  
Trailing Curtain Sync ............. 68  
Tripod socket ......................... 19  
TTL phase-matching autofocus  
............................................. 101  
Tungsten (White Balance) ... 143  
Exposure) mode .................... 89  
10  
U
Updating software ................ 218  
USB Connection .................. 233  
USER mode ......................... 168  
User registration .................. 237  
V
Vibrant (Custom Image) ....... 155  
Video terminal ...................... 200  
VIDEO/PC output terminal  
..................................... 200, 234  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
290  
WARRANTY POLICY  
All PENTAX cameras purchased through authorized bona fide  
photographic distribution channels are guaranteed against defects of  
material or workmanship for a period of twelve months from date of  
purchase. Service will be rendered, and defective parts will be replaced  
without cost to you within that period, provided the equipment does not  
show evidence of impact, sand or liquid damage, mishandling, tampering,  
battery or chemical corrosion, operation contrary to operating instructions,  
or modification by an unauthorized repair shop. The manufacturer or its  
authorized representatives shall not be liable for any repair or alterations  
except those made with its written consent and shall not be liable for  
damages from delay or loss of use or from other indirect or consequential  
damages of any kind, whether caused by defective material or  
workmanship or otherwise; and it is expressly agreed that the liability of  
the manufacturer or its representatives under all guarantees or warranties,  
whether expressed or implied, is strictly limited to the replacement of parts  
as hereinbefore provided. No refunds will be made on repairs by non-  
authorized PENTAX service facilities.  
Procedure During 12-month Warranty Period  
Any PENTAX which proves defective during the 12-month warranty period  
should be returned to the dealer from whom you purchased the equipment  
or to the manufacturer. If there are no representatives of the manufacturer  
in your country, send the equipment to the manufacturer, with postage  
prepaid. In this case, it will take a considerable length of time before the  
equipment can be returned to you owing to the complicated customs  
procedures required. If the equipment is covered by warranty, repairs will  
be made and parts replaced free of charge, and the equipment will be  
returned to you upon completion of servicing. If the equipment is not  
covered by warranty, regular charges of the manufacturer or of its  
representatives will apply. Shipping charges are to be borne by the owner.  
If your PENTAX was purchased outside of the country where you wish to  
have it serviced during the warranty period, regular handling and servicing  
fees may be charged by the manufacturer’s representatives in that  
country. Notwithstanding this, your PENTAX returned to the manufacturer  
will be serviced free of charge according to this procedure and warranty  
policy. In any case, however, shipping charges and customs clearance  
fees to be borne by the sender. To prove the date of your purchase when  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
291  
required, please keep the receipt or bills covering the purchase of your  
equipment for at least a year. Before sending your equipment for servicing,  
please make sure that you are sending it to the manufacturer’s authorized  
representatives or their approved repair shops, unless you are sending it  
directly to the manufacturer. Always obtain a quotation for the service  
charge, and only after you accept the quoted service charge, instruct the  
service station to proceed with the servicing.  
• This warranty policy does not affect the customer’s statutory  
rights.  
• The local warranty policies available from PENTAX distributors in  
some countries can supersede this warranty policy. Therefore, we  
recommend that you review the warranty card supplied with your  
product at the time of purchase, or contact the PENTAX distributor  
in your country for more information and to receive a copy of the  
warranty policy.  
10  
The CE Mark is a Directive conformity mark of the European  
Union.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
292  
For customers in USA  
STATEMENT OF FCC COMPLIANCE  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject  
to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful  
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired operation.  
Changes or modifications not approved by the party responsible for  
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a  
Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against  
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment  
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not  
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful  
interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that  
interference will not occur in a particular installation.  
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television  
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on,  
the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of  
the following measures:  
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to  
which the receiver is connected.  
* Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
For customers in Canada  
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.  
Pour les utilisateurs au Canada  
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003  
du Canada.  
10  
FOR CALIFORNIA, U.S.A. ONLY  
Perchlorate Material-special handling may apply.  
The lithium battery used in this camera contains perchlorate material,  
which may require special handling.  
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
293  
Declaration of Conformity  
According to 47CFR, Parts 2 and 15 for  
Class B Personal Computers and Peripherals  
We:  
PENTAX RICOH IMAGING AMERICAS  
CORPORATION  
Located at: 633 17th Street, Suite 2600  
Denver, Colorado 80202 U.S.A.  
Phone: 800-877-0155 FAX: 303-790-1131  
Declare under sole responsibility that the product identified herein  
complies with 47CFR Parts 2 and 15 of the FCC rules as a Class B digital  
device. Each product marketed is identical to the representative unit tested  
and found to be compliant with the standards. Records maintained  
continue to reflect the equipment being produced can be expected to be  
within the variation accepted, due to quantity production and testing on the  
statistical basis as required by 47CFR §2.909. Operation is subject to the  
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful  
interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired operation. The above  
named party is responsible for ensuring that the equipment complies with  
the standards of 47CFR §15.101 to §15.109.  
Product Name: Digital Camera  
Model Number: K-500  
10  
Contact person: Customer Service Manager  
Date and Place: May, 2013, Colorado  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
294  
Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old  
Equipment and Used Batteries  
1. In the European Union  
These symbols on the products, packaging and/or  
accompanying documents mean that used electrical and  
electronic equipment and batteries should not be mixed with  
general household waste.  
Used electrical/electronic equipment and batteries must be  
treated separately and in accordance with legislation that  
requires proper treatment, recovery and recycling of these  
products.  
By disposing of these products correctly you will help ensure  
that the waste undergoes the necessary treatment, recovery  
and recycling and thus prevent potential negative effects on the  
environment and human health which could otherwise arise  
due to inappropriate waste handling.  
If a chemical symbol is added beneath the symbol shown above, in  
accordance with the Battery Directive, this indicates that a heavy metal  
(Hg = Mercury, Cd = Cadmium, Pb = Lead) is present in the battery at a  
concentration above an applicable threshold specified in the Battery  
Directive.  
For more information about collection and recycling of used products,  
please contact your local authorities, your waste disposal service or the  
point of sale where you purchased the products.  
2. In other countries outside the EU  
These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard  
used products, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for  
the correct method of disposal.  
10  
For Switzerland: Used electrical/electronic equipment can be returned free  
of charge to the dealer, even when you don’t purchase a new product.  
Further collection facilities are listed on the home page of www.swico.ch  
or www.sens.ch.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Memo  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Memo  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PENTAX RICOH IMAGING CO., LTD.  
2-35-7, Maeno-cho, Itabashi-ku, Tokyo 174-8639, JAPAN  
(http://www.pentax.jp)  
PENTAX RICOH IMAGING 112 Quai de Bezons, B.P. 204, 95106 Argenteuil Cedex,  
FRANCE S.A.S.  
FRANCE  
(European Headquarters) (HQ - http://www.pentax.eu)  
(France - http://www.pentax.fr)  
PENTAX RICOH IMAGING Julius-Vosseler-Strasse 104, 22527 Hamburg,  
DEUTSCHLAND GmbH  
GERMANY  
(http://www.pentax.de)  
PENTAX RICOH IMAGING PENTAX House, Heron Drive, Langley, Slough, Berks  
UK LTD.  
SL3 8PN, U.K.  
(http://www.pentax.co.uk)  
PENTAX RICOH IMAGING 633 17th Street, Suite 2600, Denver, Colorado 80202,  
AMERICAS CORPORATION U.S.A.  
(http://www.pentaximaging.com)  
PENTAX RICOH IMAGING 1770 Argentia Road Mississauga, Ontario L5N 3S7,  
CANADA INC.  
CANADA  
(http://www.pentax.ca)  
PENTAX RICOH IMAGING 23D, Jun Yao International Plaza, 789 Zhaojiabang Road,  
CHINA CO., LTD.  
Xu Hui District, Shanghai, 200032, CHINA  
(http://www.pentax.com.cn)  
http://www.pentax.jp/english  
• Specifications and external dimensions are subject to change without notice.  
53780  
Copyright © PENTAX RICOH IMAGING CO., LTD. 2013  
R01DTE13 Printed in Philippines  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Pentair Swimming Pool Heater Pump User Manual
Philco Crafts DVD Player PVD1000 User Manual
Philips Baby Toy SBC SC 364 User Manual
Philips Car Satellite TV System 32PFL3406 User Manual
Philips CRT Television 15PT2526 User Manual
Philips Indoor Furnishings 31603 31 16 User Manual
Pioneer Stereo System CDX FM1287 User Manual
Porter Cable Portable Generator BSI550 User Manual
Poulan Trimmer 530086997 User Manual
Premier Heat Pump PHP HWC 150 User Manual